Mercurial > emacs
annotate man/texinfo.tex @ 71948:df5c12c54d24
(Processing of Errors): Add command-error-function.
author | Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Mon, 17 Jul 2006 21:07:20 +0000 |
parents | cf0c35ec7c54 |
children | 5e59478af974 138ce2701550 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
37713 | 1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. |
2 % | |
3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. | |
4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi | |
5 % | |
71493 | 6 \def\texinfoversion{2006-06-19.13} |
69769 | 7 % |
8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, | |
9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free | |
10 % Software Foundation, Inc. | |
37713 | 11 % |
12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or | |
13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as | |
14 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at | |
15 % your option) any later version. | |
16 % | |
17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be | |
18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty | |
19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU | |
20 % General Public License for more details. | |
21 % | |
22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
23 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write | |
64083 | 24 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, |
25 % Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. | |
37713 | 26 % |
69769 | 27 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing |
28 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without | |
29 % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) | |
37713 | 30 % |
31 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug | |
32 % reports; you can get the latest version from: | |
69769 | 33 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or |
47284 | 34 % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex |
69769 | 35 % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). |
36 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out | |
37713 | 37 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
38 % |
37713 | 39 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a |
40 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the | |
41 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. | |
42 % | |
43 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the | |
44 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple | |
45 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: | |
46 % tex foo.texi | |
47 % texindex foo.?? | |
48 % tex foo.texi | |
49 % tex foo.texi | |
47284 | 50 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. |
51 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. | |
37713 | 52 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more |
53 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. | |
54 % | |
69769 | 55 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some |
56 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the | |
57 % full Texinfo distribution. | |
58 % | |
59 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. | |
60 | |
37713 | 61 |
62 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} | |
63 | |
64 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number | |
65 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because | |
66 % they might have appeared in the input file name. | |
67 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% | |
68 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} | |
69 | |
69769 | 70 \message{Basics,} |
71 \chardef\other=12 | |
72 | |
73 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. | |
74 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. | |
75 \let\+ = \relax | |
76 | |
77 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. | |
37713 | 78 \let\ptexb=\b |
79 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet | |
80 \let\ptexc=\c | |
81 \let\ptexcomma=\, | |
82 \let\ptexdot=\. | |
83 \let\ptexdots=\dots | |
84 \let\ptexend=\end | |
85 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv | |
86 \let\ptexexclam=\! | |
69769 | 87 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
88 \let\ptexgtr=> | |
89 \let\ptexhat=^ | |
37713 | 90 \let\ptexi=\i |
69769 | 91 \let\ptexindent=\indent |
92 \let\ptexinsert=\insert | |
37713 | 93 \let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
69769 | 94 \let\ptexless=< |
95 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite | |
96 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent | |
97 \let\ptexplus=+ | |
37713 | 98 \let\ptexrbrace=\} |
69769 | 99 \let\ptexslash=\/ |
37713 | 100 \let\ptexstar=\* |
101 \let\ptext=\t | |
102 | |
103 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it | |
104 % starts a new line in the output. | |
105 \newlinechar = `^^J | |
106 | |
69769 | 107 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error |
108 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. | |
109 % | |
110 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined | |
111 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. | |
112 \else | |
113 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} | |
114 \fi | |
115 | |
37713 | 116 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. |
117 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi | |
118 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi | |
119 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi | |
120 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi | |
121 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi | |
122 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi | |
123 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi | |
124 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi | |
125 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi | |
126 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi | |
127 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi | |
128 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi | |
129 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi | |
130 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi | |
131 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi | |
132 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi | |
133 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi | |
134 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi | |
135 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi | |
136 % | |
137 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi | |
138 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi | |
139 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi | |
140 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi | |
141 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi | |
142 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi | |
143 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi | |
144 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi | |
145 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi | |
146 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi | |
147 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi | |
148 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi | |
149 % | |
150 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi | |
151 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi | |
152 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi | |
153 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi | |
154 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi | |
69769 | 155 |
156 % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. | |
157 \chardef\spacecat = 10 | |
158 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} | |
37713 | 159 |
160 % Ignore a token. | |
161 % | |
162 \def\gobble#1{} | |
163 | |
69769 | 164 % The following is used inside several \edef's. |
165 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} | |
166 | |
167 % Hyphenation fixes. | |
168 \hyphenation{ | |
169 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script | |
170 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps | |
171 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script | |
172 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm | |
173 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces | |
174 spell-ing spell-ings | |
175 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space | |
176 wide-spread wrap-around | |
177 } | |
37713 | 178 |
179 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. | |
69769 | 180 \newdimen\bindingoffset |
181 \newdimen\normaloffset | |
37713 | 182 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
183 | |
69769 | 184 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles |
185 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided | |
186 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). | |
187 % | |
188 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} | |
189 | |
190 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should | |
191 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the | |
192 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would | |
193 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main | |
194 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). | |
195 % | |
196 \def\|{% | |
197 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. | |
198 \leavevmode | |
199 % | |
200 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. | |
201 \vadjust{% | |
202 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current | |
203 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. | |
204 \vskip-\baselineskip | |
205 % | |
206 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So | |
207 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. | |
208 \llap{% | |
209 % | |
210 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. | |
211 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt | |
212 % | |
213 % This is the space between the bar and the text. | |
214 \hskip 12pt | |
215 }% | |
216 }% | |
217 } | |
218 | |
37713 | 219 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
220 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, | |
69769 | 221 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make |
222 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log | |
223 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. | |
37713 | 224 % |
225 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% | |
69769 | 226 \def\loggingall{% |
227 \tracingstats2 | |
228 \tracingpages1 | |
229 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex | |
230 \tracingparagraphs1 | |
231 \tracingoutput1 | |
232 \tracingmacros2 | |
233 \tracingrestores1 | |
234 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen | |
235 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging | |
236 \tracingscantokens1 | |
237 \tracingifs1 | |
238 \tracinggroups1 | |
239 \tracingnesting2 | |
240 \tracingassigns1 | |
241 \fi | |
242 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex | |
243 \errorcontextlines16 | |
37713 | 244 }% |
245 | |
47284 | 246 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing |
247 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
248 % |
47284 | 249 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount |
250 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} | |
251 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount | |
252 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} | |
253 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount | |
254 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} | |
255 | |
37713 | 256 % For @cropmarks command. |
257 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. | |
258 % | |
259 \newif\ifcropmarks | |
260 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue | |
261 % | |
262 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. | |
263 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 | |
264 % | |
265 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines | |
266 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc | |
267 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt | |
268 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in | |
269 | |
270 % Main output routine. | |
271 \chardef\PAGE = 255 | |
272 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} | |
273 | |
274 \newbox\headlinebox | |
275 \newbox\footlinebox | |
276 | |
277 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents | |
278 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. | |
279 \def\onepageout#1{% | |
280 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi | |
281 % | |
282 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset | |
283 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi | |
284 % | |
285 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in | |
286 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). | |
287 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% | |
288 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% | |
289 % | |
290 {% | |
291 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to | |
292 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends | |
293 % before the \shipout runs. | |
294 % | |
295 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. | |
296 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if | |
69769 | 297 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. |
298 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: | |
299 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} | |
300 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; | |
301 % it needs to be | |
302 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} | |
37713 | 303 \shipout\vbox{% |
304 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. | |
69769 | 305 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi |
37713 | 306 % |
307 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup | |
308 \hsize = \outerhsize | |
309 \vskip-\topandbottommargin | |
310 \vtop to0pt{% | |
311 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% | |
312 \nointerlineskip | |
313 \line{% | |
314 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
315 \hfill | |
316 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
317 }% | |
318 \vss}% | |
319 \vskip\topandbottommargin | |
320 \line\bgroup | |
321 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. | |
322 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi | |
323 \vbox\bgroup | |
324 \fi | |
325 % | |
326 \unvbox\headlinebox | |
327 \pagebody{#1}% | |
328 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt | |
329 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. | |
330 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) | |
331 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. | |
332 \vskip 2\baselineskip | |
333 \unvbox\footlinebox | |
334 \fi | |
335 % | |
336 \ifcropmarks | |
337 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup | |
338 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup | |
339 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill | |
340 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick | |
341 \vbox to0pt{\vss | |
342 \line{% | |
343 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
344 \hfill | |
345 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
346 }% | |
347 \nointerlineskip | |
348 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% | |
349 }% | |
350 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause | |
351 \fi | |
352 }% end of \shipout\vbox | |
69769 | 353 }% end of group with \indexdummies |
37713 | 354 \advancepageno |
355 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi | |
356 } | |
357 | |
358 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen | |
359 | |
360 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} | |
361 {\catcode`\@ =11 | |
362 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi | |
363 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) | |
364 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present | |
365 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi | |
366 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 | |
367 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi | |
368 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} | |
369 } | |
370 | |
371 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are | |
372 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize | |
373 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) | |
374 % | |
375 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} | |
376 \def\nstop{\vbox | |
377 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} | |
378 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} | |
379 \def\nsbot{\vbox | |
380 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} | |
381 | |
382 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of | |
383 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a | |
384 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. | |
385 % | |
69769 | 386 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} |
387 \def\parseargusing#1#2{% | |
388 \def\argtorun{#2}% | |
37713 | 389 \begingroup |
390 \obeylines | |
69769 | 391 \spaceisspace |
392 #1% | |
393 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. | |
394 } | |
37713 | 395 |
396 {\obeylines % | |
397 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% | |
398 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. | |
69769 | 399 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% |
37713 | 400 }% |
401 } | |
402 | |
69769 | 403 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. |
404 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} | |
405 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} | |
406 | |
407 % Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. | |
408 % | |
409 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., | |
37713 | 410 % @end itemize @c foo |
69769 | 411 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed |
412 % by \finishparsearg. | |
413 % | |
414 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} | |
415 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} | |
416 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% | |
417 \def\temp{#3}% | |
418 \ifx\temp\empty | |
419 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: | |
420 \let\temp\finishparsearg | |
421 \else | |
422 \let\temp\argcheckspaces | |
423 \fi | |
424 % Put the space token in: | |
425 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm | |
426 } | |
427 | |
428 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so | |
429 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. | |
430 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, | |
431 % just before passing the control to \argtorun. | |
432 % (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is | |
433 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger | |
434 % that a pair of braces would be stripped. | |
435 % | |
436 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. | |
437 % | |
438 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} | |
439 | |
440 % \parseargdef\foo{...} | |
441 % is roughly equivalent to | |
442 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} | |
443 % \def\Xfoo#1{...} | |
444 % | |
445 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my | |
446 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 | |
447 | |
448 \def\parseargdef#1{% | |
449 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% | |
450 } | |
451 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% | |
452 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% | |
453 \def#1##1% | |
454 } | |
455 | |
456 % Several utility definitions with active space: | |
457 { | |
37713 | 458 \obeyspaces |
69769 | 459 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } |
460 | |
461 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword | |
462 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this | |
463 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input | |
464 % should produce a line of output anyway. | |
465 % | |
466 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} | |
467 | |
468 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces | |
469 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the | |
470 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). | |
471 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} | |
472 } | |
37713 | 473 |
474 | |
475 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} | |
476 | |
69769 | 477 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: |
478 % | |
479 % \envdef\foo{...} | |
480 % \def\Efoo{...} | |
481 % | |
482 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the | |
483 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also | |
484 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks | |
485 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be | |
486 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. | |
487 % | |
488 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they | |
489 % are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The | |
490 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this | |
491 % special case.) | |
492 | |
493 | |
494 % At runtime, environments start with this: | |
495 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} | |
496 % initialize | |
497 \let\thisenv\empty | |
498 | |
499 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': | |
500 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
501 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
502 | |
503 % Check whether we're in the right environment: | |
504 \def\checkenv#1{% | |
505 \def\temp{#1}% | |
506 \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
507 \else | |
508 \badenverr | |
509 \fi | |
510 } | |
511 | |
512 % Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: | |
513 \def\badenverr{% | |
514 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
515 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, | |
516 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
517 } | |
518 \def\inenvironment#1{% | |
519 \ifx#1\empty | |
520 out of any environment% | |
521 \else | |
522 in environment \expandafter\string#1% | |
523 \fi | |
524 } | |
37713 | 525 |
526 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. | |
69769 | 527 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv |
528 % | |
529 \parseargdef\end{% | |
530 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname | |
37713 | 531 \else |
69769 | 532 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 |
533 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname | |
534 \csname E#1\endcsname | |
535 \endgroup | |
37713 | 536 \fi |
537 } | |
538 | |
69769 | 539 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} |
540 | |
37713 | 541 |
542 %% Simple single-character @ commands | |
543 | |
544 % @@ prints an @ | |
545 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). | |
546 \def\@{{\tt\char64}} | |
547 | |
548 % This is turned off because it was never documented | |
549 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. | |
550 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' | |
551 %% but suppressing ligatures. | |
552 %\def\`{{`}} | |
553 %\def\'{{'}} | |
554 | |
555 % Used to generate quoted braces. | |
556 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} | |
557 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} | |
558 \let\{=\mylbrace | |
559 \let\}=\myrbrace | |
560 \begingroup | |
69769 | 561 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, |
562 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. | |
563 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other | |
37713 | 564 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 |
69769 | 565 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other |
566 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% | |
567 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% | |
568 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% | |
569 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% | |
570 !endgroup | |
571 | |
572 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. | |
573 \let\comma = , | |
37713 | 574 |
575 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent | |
69769 | 576 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. |
37713 | 577 \let\, = \c |
578 \let\dotaccent = \. | |
579 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} | |
580 \let\tieaccent = \t | |
581 \let\ubaraccent = \b | |
582 \let\udotaccent = \d | |
583 | |
69769 | 584 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm |
585 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. | |
37713 | 586 \def\questiondown{?`} |
587 \def\exclamdown{!`} | |
69769 | 588 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} |
589 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} | |
37713 | 590 |
591 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. | |
592 \def\imacro{i} | |
593 \def\jmacro{j} | |
594 \def\dotless#1{% | |
595 \def\temp{#1}% | |
596 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi | |
597 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j | |
598 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% | |
599 \fi\fi | |
600 } | |
601 | |
69769 | 602 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a |
603 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) | |
604 % | |
605 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } | |
606 | |
607 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in | |
608 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most | |
609 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using | |
610 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and | |
611 % \scriptscriptstyle). | |
612 % | |
613 \def\LaTeX{% | |
614 L\kern-.36em | |
615 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% | |
616 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% | |
617 \kern-.15em | |
618 \TeX | |
619 } | |
620 | |
37713 | 621 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
622 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space | |
623 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and | |
624 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the | |
625 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. | |
626 {\catcode`@ = 11 | |
627 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble | |
628 % if the definition is written into an index file. | |
629 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M | |
630 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } | |
631 } | |
632 | |
633 % @: forces normal size whitespace following. | |
634 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } | |
635 | |
636 % @* forces a line break. | |
637 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} | |
638 | |
69769 | 639 % @/ allows a line break. |
640 \let\/=\allowbreak | |
641 | |
37713 | 642 % @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
69769 | 643 \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
37713 | 644 |
645 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. | |
69769 | 646 \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
37713 | 647 |
648 % @? is an end-of-sentence query. | |
69769 | 649 \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
650 | |
651 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. | |
652 % | |
653 \def\onword{on} | |
654 \def\offword{off} | |
655 % | |
656 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{% | |
657 \def\temp{#1}% | |
658 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing | |
659 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing | |
660 \else | |
661 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
662 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% | |
663 \fi\fi | |
664 } | |
37713 | 665 |
666 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the | |
667 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would | |
668 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. | |
669 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} | |
670 | |
671 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing | |
672 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box | |
673 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for | |
674 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is | |
675 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, | |
676 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and | |
677 % the text is small, which looks bad. | |
678 % | |
69769 | 679 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can |
680 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it | |
681 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an | |
682 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The | |
683 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit | |
684 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). | |
685 % | |
686 \newbox\groupbox | |
687 \def\vfilllimit{0.7} | |
688 % | |
689 \envdef\group{% | |
690 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else | |
37713 | 691 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp |
692 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% | |
693 \fi | |
69769 | 694 \startsavinginserts |
695 % | |
696 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup | |
37713 | 697 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as |
698 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an | |
699 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after | |
700 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group | |
701 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo | |
702 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. | |
703 \comment | |
704 } | |
705 % | |
69769 | 706 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts |
707 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) | |
708 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space | |
709 % above. But it's pretty close. | |
710 \def\Egroup{% | |
711 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group | |
712 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. | |
713 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. | |
714 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth | |
715 \egroup % End the \vtop. | |
716 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. | |
717 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox | |
718 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). | |
719 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal | |
720 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big | |
721 % group, force a page break. | |
722 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
723 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight | |
724 \page | |
725 \fi | |
726 \fi | |
727 \box\groupbox | |
728 \prevdepth = \dimen1 | |
729 \checkinserts | |
730 } | |
731 % | |
37713 | 732 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help |
733 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. | |
734 % | |
735 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% | |
736 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% | |
737 where each line of input produces a line of output.} | |
738 | |
739 % @need space-in-mils | |
740 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. | |
741 | |
742 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in | |
743 | |
744 % Old definition--didn't work. | |
69769 | 745 %\parseargdef\need{\par % |
37713 | 746 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
747 %% if the depth of the box does not fit. | |
748 %{\baselineskip=0pt% | |
749 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak | |
750 %\prevdepth=-1000pt | |
751 %}} | |
752 | |
69769 | 753 \parseargdef\need{% |
37713 | 754 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a |
755 % paragraph. | |
756 \par | |
757 % | |
758 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. | |
759 \dimen0 = #1\mil | |
760 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox | |
761 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox | |
762 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
763 % | |
764 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the | |
765 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. | |
766 % And a page break here is fine. | |
767 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% | |
768 % | |
769 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the | |
770 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the | |
771 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider | |
772 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the | |
773 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. | |
774 % | |
775 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the | |
776 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in | |
777 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which | |
778 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing | |
779 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an | |
780 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real | |
781 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. | |
782 \penalty9999 | |
783 % | |
784 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. | |
785 \kern -#1\mil | |
786 % | |
787 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. | |
788 \nobreak | |
789 \fi | |
790 } | |
791 | |
69769 | 792 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). |
37713 | 793 |
794 \let\br = \par | |
795 | |
69769 | 796 % @page forces the start of a new page. |
37713 | 797 % |
798 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
799 | |
800 % @exdent text.... | |
801 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin | |
802 | |
803 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. | |
804 % That's how much \exdent should take out. | |
805 \newskip\exdentamount | |
806 | |
807 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. | |
69769 | 808 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} |
37713 | 809 |
810 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. | |
69769 | 811 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount |
812 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} | |
37713 | 813 |
814 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current | |
815 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion | |
816 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. | |
817 % | |
818 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm | |
819 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} | |
820 % | |
821 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% | |
822 \nobreak | |
823 \kern-\strutdepth | |
824 \vtop to \strutdepth{% | |
825 \baselineskip=\strutdepth | |
826 \vss | |
827 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to | |
828 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. | |
829 \ifx#1l% | |
830 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% | |
831 \else | |
832 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% | |
833 \fi | |
834 \null | |
835 }% | |
836 }} | |
837 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} | |
838 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} | |
839 % | |
840 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} | |
841 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; | |
842 % else use TEXT for both). | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
843 % |
37713 | 844 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} |
845 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
846 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
37713 | 847 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
848 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts | |
849 \def\righttext{#2}% | |
850 \else | |
851 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text | |
852 \def\righttext{#1}% | |
853 \fi | |
854 % | |
855 \ifodd\pageno | |
856 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin | |
857 \else | |
858 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% | |
859 \fi | |
860 \temp | |
861 } | |
862 | |
863 % @include file insert text of that file as input. | |
69769 | 864 % |
865 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} | |
866 \def\includezzz#1{% | |
867 \pushthisfilestack | |
37713 | 868 \def\thisfile{#1}% |
69769 | 869 {% |
870 \makevalueexpandable | |
871 \def\temp{\input #1 }% | |
872 \expandafter | |
873 }\temp | |
874 \popthisfilestack | |
875 } | |
876 \def\filenamecatcodes{% | |
877 \catcode`\\=\other | |
878 \catcode`~=\other | |
879 \catcode`^=\other | |
880 \catcode`_=\other | |
881 \catcode`|=\other | |
882 \catcode`<=\other | |
883 \catcode`>=\other | |
884 \catcode`+=\other | |
885 \catcode`-=\other | |
886 } | |
887 | |
888 \def\pushthisfilestack{% | |
889 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm | |
890 } | |
891 \def\pushthisfilestackX{% | |
892 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm | |
893 } | |
894 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% | |
895 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% | |
896 } | |
897 | |
898 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} | |
899 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: | |
900 the stack of filenames is empty.}} | |
37713 | 901 |
902 \def\thisfile{} | |
903 | |
69769 | 904 % @center line |
905 % outputs that line, centered. | |
906 % | |
907 \parseargdef\center{% | |
908 \ifhmode | |
909 \let\next\centerH | |
910 \else | |
911 \let\next\centerV | |
912 \fi | |
913 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% | |
914 } | |
915 \def\centerH#1{% | |
916 {% | |
917 \hfil\break | |
918 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip | |
919 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
920 \line{#1}% | |
921 \break | |
922 }% | |
923 } | |
924 \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} | |
37713 | 925 |
926 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space | |
927 | |
69769 | 928 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} |
37713 | 929 |
930 % @comment ...line which is ignored... | |
931 % @c is the same as @comment | |
932 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment | |
933 | |
934 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% | |
935 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% | |
936 \commentxxx} | |
937 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} | |
938 | |
939 \let\c=\comment | |
940 | |
941 % @paragraphindent NCHARS | |
942 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. | |
69769 | 943 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. |
944 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
945 % |
37713 | 946 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords |
947 \def\noneword{none} | |
948 % | |
69769 | 949 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% |
37713 | 950 \def\temp{#1}% |
951 \ifx\temp\asisword | |
952 \else | |
953 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
954 \defaultparindent = 0pt | |
955 \else | |
956 \defaultparindent = #1em | |
957 \fi | |
958 \fi | |
959 \parindent = \defaultparindent | |
960 } | |
961 | |
962 % @exampleindent NCHARS | |
963 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. | |
964 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but | |
965 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. | |
69769 | 966 \parseargdef\exampleindent{% |
37713 | 967 \def\temp{#1}% |
968 \ifx\temp\asisword | |
969 \else | |
970 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
971 \lispnarrowing = 0pt | |
972 \else | |
973 \lispnarrowing = #1em | |
974 \fi | |
975 \fi | |
976 } | |
977 | |
69769 | 978 % @firstparagraphindent WORD |
979 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph | |
980 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such | |
981 % paragraphs. | |
982 % | |
983 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling | |
984 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. | |
985 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. | |
986 % By default, we suppress indentation. | |
987 % | |
988 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
989 \def\insertword{insert} | |
990 % | |
991 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% | |
992 \def\temp{#1}% | |
993 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
994 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent | |
995 \else\ifx\temp\insertword | |
996 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax | |
997 \else | |
998 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
999 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% | |
1000 \fi\fi | |
1001 } | |
1002 | |
1003 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to | |
1004 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. | |
1005 % | |
1006 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next | |
1007 % paragraph. | |
1008 % | |
1009 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% | |
1010 \gdef\indent{% | |
1011 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1012 \indent | |
1013 }% | |
1014 \gdef\noindent{% | |
1015 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1016 \noindent | |
1017 }% | |
1018 \global\everypar = {% | |
1019 \kern -\parindent | |
1020 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1021 }% | |
1022 } | |
1023 | |
1024 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% | |
1025 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent | |
1026 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent | |
1027 \global \everypar = {}% | |
1028 } | |
1029 | |
1030 | |
37713 | 1031 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. |
1032 % | |
1033 \def\asis#1{#1} | |
1034 | |
47284 | 1035 % @math outputs its argument in math mode. |
1036 % | |
1037 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean | |
1038 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make | |
69769 | 1039 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, |
1040 % which is what @var uses. | |
1041 { | |
1042 \catcode`\_ = \active | |
1043 \gdef\mathunderscore{% | |
1044 \catcode`\_=\active | |
1045 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% | |
1046 } | |
1047 } | |
47284 | 1048 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. |
1049 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but | |
1050 % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not | |
1051 % otherwise define @\. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
1052 % |
47284 | 1053 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. |
1054 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} | |
1055 % | |
1056 \def\math{% | |
1057 \tex | |
69769 | 1058 \mathunderscore |
47284 | 1059 \let\\ = \mathbackslash |
69769 | 1060 \mathactive |
1061 $\finishmath | |
1062 } | |
1063 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. | |
1064 | |
1065 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. | |
1066 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument | |
1067 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). | |
1068 % | |
1069 { | |
1070 \catcode`^ = \active | |
1071 \catcode`< = \active | |
1072 \catcode`> = \active | |
1073 \catcode`+ = \active | |
1074 \gdef\mathactive{% | |
1075 \let^ = \ptexhat | |
1076 \let< = \ptexless | |
1077 \let> = \ptexgtr | |
1078 \let+ = \ptexplus | |
1079 } | |
1080 } | |
37713 | 1081 |
1082 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. | |
69769 | 1083 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} |
1084 \def\minus{$-$} | |
1085 | |
1086 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. | |
71093 | 1087 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm |
1088 % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, | |
1089 % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do | |
1090 % whichever is larger. | |
69769 | 1091 % |
1092 \def\dots{% | |
1093 \leavevmode | |
71093 | 1094 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods |
1095 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em | |
1096 \dimen0 = \wd0 | |
1097 \else | |
1098 \dimen0 = 1.5em | |
1099 \fi | |
1100 \hbox to \dimen0{% | |
1101 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil | |
1102 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil | |
1103 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil | |
1104 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil | |
69769 | 1105 }% |
1106 } | |
1107 | |
1108 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. | |
1109 % | |
1110 \def\enddots{% | |
1111 \dots | |
1112 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor | |
1113 } | |
1114 | |
1115 % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up | |
1116 % Texinfo's parsing. | |
1117 % | |
1118 \let\comma = , | |
37713 | 1119 |
1120 % @refill is a no-op. | |
1121 \let\refill=\relax | |
1122 | |
1123 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to | |
1124 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. | |
1125 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). | |
1126 % | |
1127 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. | |
1128 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse | |
1129 | |
1130 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. | |
1131 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. | |
1132 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. | |
1133 \def\setfilename{% | |
69769 | 1134 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
37713 | 1135 \iflinks |
69769 | 1136 \tryauxfile |
1137 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. | |
1138 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux | |
37713 | 1139 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. |
1140 \openindices | |
69769 | 1141 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
37713 | 1142 % |
1143 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. | |
1144 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. | |
1145 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf | |
69769 | 1146 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi |
1147 \closein 1 | |
37713 | 1148 % |
1149 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. | |
1150 } | |
1151 | |
1152 % Called from \setfilename. | |
1153 % | |
1154 \def\openindices{% | |
1155 \newindex{cp}% | |
1156 \newcodeindex{fn}% | |
1157 \newcodeindex{vr}% | |
1158 \newcodeindex{tp}% | |
1159 \newcodeindex{ky}% | |
1160 \newcodeindex{pg}% | |
1161 } | |
1162 | |
1163 % @bye. | |
1164 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} | |
1165 | |
1166 | |
1167 \message{pdf,} | |
1168 % adobe `portable' document format | |
1169 \newcount\tempnum | |
1170 \newcount\lnkcount | |
1171 \newtoks\filename | |
1172 \newcount\filenamelength | |
1173 \newcount\pgn | |
1174 \newtoks\toksA | |
1175 \newtoks\toksB | |
1176 \newtoks\toksC | |
1177 \newtoks\toksD | |
1178 \newbox\boxA | |
1179 \newcount\countA | |
1180 \newif\ifpdf | |
1181 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest | |
1182 | |
69769 | 1183 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 |
1184 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, | |
1185 % borrowed from ifpdf.sty. | |
37713 | 1186 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined |
1187 \else | |
69769 | 1188 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax |
1189 \else | |
1190 \ifcase\pdfoutput | |
1191 \else | |
1192 \pdftrue | |
1193 \fi | |
1194 \fi | |
1195 \fi | |
1196 | |
1197 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, | |
1198 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to | |
1199 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be | |
1200 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. | |
1201 % http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html | |
1202 % (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX | |
1203 % user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so | |
1204 % that's what we do). | |
1205 | |
1206 % double active backslashes. | |
1207 % | |
1208 {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active | |
1209 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% | |
1210 @catcode`@\=@active | |
1211 @let\=@doublebackslash} | |
1212 } | |
1213 | |
1214 % To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are | |
1215 % not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as | |
1216 % us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens. I've | |
1217 % tinkered with it a little for texinfo, but it's definitely from there. | |
1218 % | |
1219 % #1 is the tokens to replace. | |
1220 % #2 is the replacement. | |
1221 % #3 is the control sequence with the string. | |
1222 % | |
1223 \def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% | |
1224 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% | |
1225 ##1% | |
1226 \ifx\\##2\\% | |
1227 \else | |
1228 #2% | |
1229 \HyReturnAfterFi{% | |
1230 \HyPsdReplace##2\END | |
1231 }% | |
1232 \fi | |
1233 }% | |
1234 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% | |
1235 } | |
1236 \long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} | |
1237 | |
1238 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. | |
1239 \def\backslashparens#1{% | |
1240 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply | |
1241 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. | |
1242 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% | |
1243 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% | |
1244 } | |
1245 | |
1246 \ifpdf | |
37713 | 1247 \input pdfcolor |
69769 | 1248 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% |
70570 | 1249 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). |
37713 | 1250 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% |
70570 | 1251 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
1252 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | |
47284 | 1253 % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is |
1254 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) | |
37713 | 1255 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 |
47284 | 1256 \immediate\pdfimage |
37713 | 1257 \else |
47284 | 1258 \immediate\pdfximage |
37713 | 1259 \fi |
70570 | 1260 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi |
1261 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi | |
37713 | 1262 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 |
69769 | 1263 #1.pdf% |
37713 | 1264 \else |
1265 {#1.pdf}% | |
1266 \fi | |
1267 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else | |
1268 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage | |
1269 \fi} | |
69769 | 1270 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% |
1271 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters | |
1272 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. | |
1273 \atdummies | |
1274 \activebackslashdouble | |
1275 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% | |
1276 \backslashparens\pdfdestname | |
1277 \pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz% | |
1278 }}% | |
1279 % | |
1280 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. | |
1281 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}% | |
1282 % | |
37713 | 1283 \let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light? |
1284 \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} | |
1285 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines | |
1286 % come from Petr Olsak | |
1287 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% | |
1288 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} | |
1289 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax | |
69769 | 1290 \advance\tempnum by 1 |
37713 | 1291 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} |
69769 | 1292 % |
1293 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the | |
1294 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number | |
1295 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, | |
1296 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. | |
1297 % #4 is the page number | |
1298 % | |
1299 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% | |
1300 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the | |
1301 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section | |
1302 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't | |
1303 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. | |
1304 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | |
1305 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty | |
1306 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% | |
1307 \else | |
1308 % Doubled backslashes in the name. | |
1309 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | |
1310 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% | |
1311 \fi | |
1312 % | |
1313 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. | |
1314 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% | |
1315 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% | |
1316 % | |
1317 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% | |
1318 } | |
1319 % | |
1320 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% | |
1321 \begingroup | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
1322 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks |
37713 | 1323 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace |
1324 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace | |
1325 % | |
69769 | 1326 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. |
1327 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1328 \def\thischapnum{##2}% | |
1329 \def\thissecnum{0}% | |
1330 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1331 }% | |
1332 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1333 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% | |
1334 \def\thissecnum{##2}% | |
1335 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1336 }% | |
1337 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1338 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% | |
1339 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% | |
1340 }% | |
1341 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1342 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% | |
1343 }% | |
1344 \def\thischapnum{0}% | |
1345 \def\thissecnum{0}% | |
1346 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1347 % | |
1348 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et | |
1349 % al. a second time, below. | |
1350 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1351 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1352 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1353 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1354 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1355 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1356 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1357 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1358 \readdatafile{toc}% | |
1359 % | |
1360 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. | |
1361 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of | |
1362 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. | |
1363 % | |
1364 % We use the node names as the destinations. | |
1365 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1366 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1367 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1368 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1369 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1370 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1371 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero | |
1372 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1373 % | |
1374 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of | |
1375 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, | |
1376 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from | |
1377 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from | |
1378 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. | |
1379 % | |
1380 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to | |
1381 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right | |
1382 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. | |
1383 \indexnofonts | |
1384 \setupdatafile | |
1385 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash | |
37713 | 1386 \input \jobname.toc |
69769 | 1387 \endgroup |
37713 | 1388 } |
69769 | 1389 % |
37713 | 1390 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% |
1391 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax | |
1392 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces | |
1393 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% | |
1394 \advance\filenamelength by 1 | |
1395 \fi | |
1396 \fi | |
1397 \nextsp} | |
1398 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} | |
1399 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | |
1400 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink | |
1401 \else | |
1402 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink | |
1403 \fi | |
69769 | 1404 % make a live url in pdf output. |
37713 | 1405 \def\pdfurl#1{% |
1406 \begingroup | |
69769 | 1407 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not |
1408 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context | |
1409 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one | |
1410 % people have actually reported a problem with. | |
1411 % | |
1412 \normalturnoffactive | |
1413 \def\@{@}% | |
1414 \let\/=\empty | |
1415 \makevalueexpandable | |
37713 | 1416 \leavevmode\Red |
1417 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
1418 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% | |
1419 \endgroup} | |
1420 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} | |
1421 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | |
1422 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} | |
1423 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} | |
1424 \def\maketoks{% | |
69769 | 1425 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax |
37713 | 1426 \ifx\first0\adn0 |
1427 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 | |
1428 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
1429 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 |
37713 | 1430 \else |
1431 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi | |
1432 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else | |
1433 \let\next=\maketoks | |
1434 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} | |
1435 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi | |
1436 \fi | |
1437 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
1438 \next} | |
1439 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% | |
1440 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} | |
1441 \def\pdflink#1{% | |
47284 | 1442 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} |
37713 | 1443 \linkcolor #1\endlink} |
1444 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} | |
69769 | 1445 \else |
1446 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble | |
1447 \let\pdfurl = \gobble | |
1448 \let\endlink = \relax | |
1449 \let\linkcolor = \relax | |
1450 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax | |
1451 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput | |
37713 | 1452 |
1453 | |
1454 \message{fonts,} | |
69769 | 1455 |
1456 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. | |
1457 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in | |
1458 % italics, not bold italics. | |
1459 % | |
1460 \def\setfontstyle#1{% | |
1461 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. | |
1462 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font | |
1463 } | |
1464 | |
1465 % Select #1 fonts with the current style. | |
1466 % | |
1467 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} | |
1468 | |
1469 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} | |
1470 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} | |
1471 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} | |
1472 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} | |
1473 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} | |
37713 | 1474 |
1475 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. | |
69769 | 1476 % So we set up a \sf. |
37713 | 1477 \newfam\sffam |
69769 | 1478 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} |
37713 | 1479 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. |
1480 | |
69769 | 1481 % We don't need math for this font style. |
1482 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} | |
37713 | 1483 |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1484 |
47284 | 1485 % Default leading. |
1486 \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt | |
1487 | |
1488 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size | |
1489 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers | |
1490 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. | |
1491 % | |
1492 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} | |
1493 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} | |
1494 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} | |
1495 % | |
1496 \def\setleading#1{% | |
1497 \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax | |
1498 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip | |
1499 \normalbaselines | |
1500 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% | |
1501 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip | |
1502 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip | |
1503 }% | |
1504 } | |
37713 | 1505 |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1506 |
37713 | 1507 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
1508 % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). | |
1509 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor | |
1510 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} | |
1511 | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1512 |
37713 | 1513 % Use cm as the default font prefix. |
1514 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix | |
1515 % before you read in texinfo.tex. | |
1516 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined | |
1517 \def\fontprefix{cm} | |
1518 \fi | |
1519 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. | |
1520 \def\rmshape{r} | |
1521 \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold | |
1522 \def\bfshape{b} | |
1523 \def\bxshape{bx} | |
1524 \def\ttshape{tt} | |
1525 \def\ttbshape{tt} | |
1526 \def\ttslshape{sltt} | |
1527 \def\itshape{ti} | |
1528 \def\itbshape{bxti} | |
1529 \def\slshape{sl} | |
1530 \def\slbshape{bxsl} | |
1531 \def\sfshape{ss} | |
1532 \def\sfbshape{ss} | |
1533 \def\scshape{csc} | |
1534 \def\scbshape{csc} | |
1535 | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1536 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1537 % Texinfo. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1538 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1539 \def\definetextfontsizexi{ |
69769 | 1540 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). |
1541 \def\textnominalsize{11pt} | |
1542 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} | |
1543 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1544 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
37713 | 1545 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1546 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1547 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1548 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1549 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1550 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1551 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
1552 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
1553 | |
69769 | 1554 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
1555 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} | |
37713 | 1556 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} |
69769 | 1557 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} |
1558 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} | |
37713 | 1559 |
1560 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | |
69769 | 1561 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
37713 | 1562 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
1563 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} | |
1564 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} | |
1565 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} | |
1566 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} | |
1567 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} | |
1568 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} | |
1569 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} | |
1570 \font\smalli=cmmi9 | |
1571 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | |
1572 | |
47284 | 1573 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
69769 | 1574 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
47284 | 1575 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000} |
1576 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000} | |
1577 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800} | |
1578 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000} | |
1579 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000} | |
1580 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000} | |
1581 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800} | |
1582 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800} | |
1583 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 | |
1584 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 | |
1585 | |
69769 | 1586 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
1587 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} | |
37713 | 1588 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
1589 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1590 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1591 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} | |
1592 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1593 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} | |
1594 \let\titlebf=\titlerm | |
1595 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1596 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 | |
1597 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | |
1598 \def\authorrm{\secrm} | |
69769 | 1599 \def\authortt{\sectt} |
37713 | 1600 |
1601 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). | |
69769 | 1602 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} |
37713 | 1603 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
1604 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1605 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1606 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} | |
1607 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1608 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} | |
1609 \let\chapbf=\chaprm | |
1610 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1611 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 | |
1612 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 | |
1613 | |
1614 % Section fonts (14.4pt). | |
69769 | 1615 \def\secnominalsize{14pt} |
37713 | 1616 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
1617 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1618 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1619 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} | |
1620 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1621 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} | |
1622 \let\secbf\secrm | |
1623 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1624 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 | |
1625 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | |
1626 | |
1627 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). | |
69769 | 1628 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} |
37713 | 1629 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
1630 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} | |
1631 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} | |
1632 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | |
1633 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} | |
1634 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | |
1635 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm | |
69769 | 1636 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315} |
37713 | 1637 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
1638 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 | |
69769 | 1639 |
1640 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). | |
1641 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} | |
1642 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000} | |
1643 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000} | |
1644 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000} | |
1645 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000} | |
1646 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000} | |
1647 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000} | |
1648 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000} | |
1649 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000} | |
1650 \font\reducedi=cmmi10 | |
1651 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 | |
37713 | 1652 |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1653 % reset the current fonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1654 \textfonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1655 \rm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1656 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1657 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1658 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1659 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1660 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1661 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1662 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1663 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1664 \def\definetextfontsizex{% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1665 % Text fonts (10pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1666 \def\textnominalsize{10pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1667 \edef\mainmagstep{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1668 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1669 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1670 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1671 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1672 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1673 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1674 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1675 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1676 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1677 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1678 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1679 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1680 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1681 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1682 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1683 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1684 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1685 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1686 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1687 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1688 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1689 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1690 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1691 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1692 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1693 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1694 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1695 \font\smalli=cmmi9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1696 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1697 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1698 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1699 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1700 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1701 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1702 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1703 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1704 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1705 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1706 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1707 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1708 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1709 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1710 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1711 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1712 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1713 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1714 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1715 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1716 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1717 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1718 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1719 \let\titlebf=\titlerm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1720 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1721 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1722 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1723 \def\authorrm{\secrm} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1724 \def\authortt{\sectt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1725 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1726 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1727 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1728 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1729 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1730 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1731 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1732 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1733 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1734 \let\chapbf\chaprm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1735 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1736 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1737 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1738 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1739 % Section fonts (12pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1740 \def\secnominalsize{12pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1741 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1742 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1743 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1744 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1745 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1746 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1747 \let\secbf\secrm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1748 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1749 \font\seci=cmmi12 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1750 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1751 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1752 % Subsection fonts (10pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1753 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1754 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1755 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1756 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1757 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1758 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1759 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1760 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1761 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1762 \font\sseci=cmmi10 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1763 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1764 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1765 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1766 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1767 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1768 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1769 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1770 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1771 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1772 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1773 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1774 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1775 \font\reducedi=cmmi9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1776 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1777 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1778 % reduce space between paragraphs |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1779 \divide\parskip by 2 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1780 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1781 % reset the current fonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1782 \textfonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1783 \rm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1784 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1785 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1786 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1787 % We provide the user-level command |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1788 % @fonttextsize 10 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1789 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1790 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1791 \def\xword{10} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1792 \def\xiword{11} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1793 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1794 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1795 \def\textsizearg{#1}% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1796 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1797 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1798 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1799 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1800 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1801 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1802 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1803 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1804 \else |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1805 \errhelp=\EMsimple |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1806 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1807 \fi\fi |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1808 \endgroup |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1809 } |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1810 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1811 |
37713 | 1812 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
1813 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since | |
47284 | 1814 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except |
1815 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and | |
1816 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). | |
37713 | 1817 % |
1818 \def\resetmathfonts{% | |
47284 | 1819 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy |
1820 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf | |
1821 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf | |
1822 } | |
37713 | 1823 |
1824 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead | |
69769 | 1825 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the |
1826 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire | |
1827 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. | |
1828 % | |
1829 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) | |
1830 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in | |
1831 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. | |
1832 % | |
1833 % This all needs generalizing, badly. | |
1834 % | |
37713 | 1835 \def\textfonts{% |
1836 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl | |
1837 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc | |
69769 | 1838 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy |
1839 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl | |
1840 \def\curfontsize{text}% | |
1841 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
47284 | 1842 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} |
37713 | 1843 \def\titlefonts{% |
1844 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl | |
1845 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc | |
1846 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy | |
1847 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl | |
69769 | 1848 \def\curfontsize{title}% |
1849 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% | |
37713 | 1850 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} |
1851 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} | |
1852 \def\chapfonts{% | |
1853 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl | |
1854 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc | |
69769 | 1855 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy |
1856 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl | |
1857 \def\curfontsize{chap}% | |
1858 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% | |
37713 | 1859 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} |
1860 \def\secfonts{% | |
1861 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl | |
1862 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc | |
69769 | 1863 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy |
1864 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl | |
1865 \def\curfontsize{sec}% | |
1866 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% | |
37713 | 1867 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} |
1868 \def\subsecfonts{% | |
1869 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl | |
1870 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc | |
69769 | 1871 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy |
1872 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl | |
1873 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% | |
1874 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% | |
37713 | 1875 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} |
69769 | 1876 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts |
1877 \def\reducedfonts{% | |
1878 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl | |
1879 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc | |
1880 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy | |
1881 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl | |
1882 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% | |
1883 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
1884 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | |
37713 | 1885 \def\smallfonts{% |
1886 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl | |
1887 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc | |
1888 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy | |
1889 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl | |
69769 | 1890 \def\curfontsize{small}% |
1891 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
47284 | 1892 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} |
1893 \def\smallerfonts{% | |
1894 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl | |
1895 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc | |
1896 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy | |
1897 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl | |
69769 | 1898 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% |
1899 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
47284 | 1900 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} |
69769 | 1901 |
1902 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. | |
1903 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts | |
1904 | |
1905 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample | |
1906 % can fit this many characters: | |
1907 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 | |
1908 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: | |
1909 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 | |
1910 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth | |
1911 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. | |
1912 % | |
1913 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): | |
1914 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 | |
1915 % | |
1916 % I wish the USA used A4 paper. | |
1917 % --karl, 24jan03. | |
1918 | |
37713 | 1919 |
1920 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. | |
1921 % | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1922 \definetextfontsizexi |
37713 | 1923 |
1924 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. | |
1925 \def\angleleft{$\langle$} | |
1926 \def\angleright{$\rangle$} | |
1927 | |
1928 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks | |
1929 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 | |
1930 | |
1931 % Fonts for short table of contents. | |
1932 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} | |
69769 | 1933 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} % no cmb12 |
37713 | 1934 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} |
69769 | 1935 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000} |
37713 | 1936 |
1937 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans | |
1938 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic | |
1939 | |
1940 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction | |
1941 % unless the following character is such as not to need one. | |
69769 | 1942 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else |
1943 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} | |
1944 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
1945 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
1946 | |
1947 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. | |
1948 % @var is set to this for defun arguments. | |
1949 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
1950 | |
1951 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want | |
1952 % ttsl for book titles, do we? | |
1953 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
37713 | 1954 |
1955 \let\i=\smartitalic | |
69769 | 1956 \let\slanted=\smartslanted |
37713 | 1957 \let\var=\smartslanted |
1958 \let\dfn=\smartslanted | |
1959 \let\emph=\smartitalic | |
69769 | 1960 |
1961 % @b, explicit bold. | |
37713 | 1962 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
1963 \let\strong=\b | |
1964 | |
69769 | 1965 % @sansserif, explicit sans. |
1966 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} | |
1967 | |
37713 | 1968 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at |
1969 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the | |
1970 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. | |
1971 % | |
1972 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} | |
1973 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } | |
1974 | |
69769 | 1975 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. |
1976 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and | |
1977 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. | |
1978 % | |
1979 \chardef\colonChar = `\: | |
1980 \chardef\commaChar = `\, | |
1981 \chardef\dotChar = `\. | |
1982 \chardef\exclamChar= `\! | |
1983 \chardef\questChar = `\? | |
1984 \chardef\semiChar = `\; | |
1985 % | |
1986 \catcode`@=11 | |
1987 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% | |
1988 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m | |
1989 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m | |
1990 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends | |
1991 } | |
1992 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% | |
1993 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 | |
1994 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 | |
1995 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends | |
1996 } | |
1997 \catcode`@=\other | |
1998 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default | |
1999 | |
37713 | 2000 \def\t#1{% |
69769 | 2001 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% |
37713 | 2002 \null |
2003 } | |
2004 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} | |
2005 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} | |
2006 \font\keysy=cmsy9 | |
2007 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% | |
2008 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% | |
2009 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt | |
2010 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% | |
2011 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% | |
2012 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} | |
2013 % The old definition, with no lozenge: | |
2014 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} | |
2015 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} | |
2016 | |
2017 % @file, @option are the same as @samp. | |
2018 \let\file=\samp | |
2019 \let\option=\samp | |
2020 | |
2021 % @code is a modification of @t, | |
2022 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. | |
2023 \def\tclose#1{% | |
2024 {% | |
2025 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. | |
2026 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font | |
2027 % | |
2028 % Switch to typewriter. | |
2029 \tt | |
2030 % | |
2031 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. | |
2032 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% | |
2033 % | |
2034 % Turn off hyphenation. | |
2035 \nohyphenation | |
2036 % | |
2037 \rawbackslash | |
69769 | 2038 \plainfrenchspacing |
37713 | 2039 #1% |
2040 }% | |
2041 \null | |
2042 } | |
2043 | |
69769 | 2044 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. |
37713 | 2045 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes |
2046 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. | |
2047 | |
2048 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control | |
2049 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. | |
2050 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) | |
2051 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. | |
2052 % -- rms. | |
2053 { | |
2054 \catcode`\-=\active | |
2055 \catcode`\_=\active | |
2056 % | |
2057 \global\def\code{\begingroup | |
69769 | 2058 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active |
2059 \ifallowcodebreaks | |
2060 \let-\codedash | |
2061 \let_\codeunder | |
2062 \else | |
2063 \let-\realdash | |
2064 \let_\realunder | |
2065 \fi | |
37713 | 2066 \codex |
2067 } | |
2068 } | |
2069 | |
2070 \def\realdash{-} | |
2071 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} | |
47284 | 2072 \def\codeunder{% |
2073 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ | |
2074 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) | |
2075 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us | |
2076 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. | |
2077 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode | |
2078 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. | |
2079 \else\normalunderscore \fi | |
2080 \discretionary{}{}{}}% | |
2081 {\_}% | |
2082 } | |
37713 | 2083 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
2084 | |
69769 | 2085 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., |
2086 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in | |
2087 % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in | |
2088 % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. | |
2089 % | |
2090 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue | |
2091 | |
2092 \def\keywordtrue{true} | |
2093 \def\keywordfalse{false} | |
2094 | |
2095 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% | |
2096 \def\txiarg{#1}% | |
2097 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue | |
2098 \allowcodebreakstrue | |
2099 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse | |
2100 \allowcodebreaksfalse | |
2101 \else | |
2102 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
2103 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% | |
2104 \fi\fi | |
2105 } | |
2106 | |
37713 | 2107 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
2108 % then @kbd has no effect. | |
2109 | |
2110 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), | |
2111 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), | |
2112 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). | |
69769 | 2113 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% |
2114 \def\txiarg{#1}% | |
2115 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct | |
37713 | 2116 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% |
69769 | 2117 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample |
37713 | 2118 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
69769 | 2119 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode |
37713 | 2120 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
69769 | 2121 \else |
2122 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
2123 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% | |
37713 | 2124 \fi\fi\fi |
2125 } | |
2126 \def\worddistinct{distinct} | |
2127 \def\wordexample{example} | |
2128 \def\wordcode{code} | |
2129 | |
69769 | 2130 % Default is `distinct.' |
2131 \kbdinputstyle distinct | |
37713 | 2132 |
2133 \def\xkey{\key} | |
2134 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% | |
2135 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% | |
2136 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi | |
2137 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} | |
2138 | |
69769 | 2139 % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. |
2140 \let\indicateurl=\code | |
37713 | 2141 \let\env=\code |
2142 \let\command=\code | |
2143 | |
2144 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) | |
2145 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third | |
2146 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url | |
2147 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in | |
2148 % a hypertex \special here. | |
2149 % | |
2150 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} | |
2151 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup | |
2152 \unsepspaces | |
2153 \pdfurl{#1}% | |
2154 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | |
2155 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
2156 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that | |
2157 \else | |
2158 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
2159 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
2160 \ifpdf | |
2161 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it | |
2162 \else | |
2163 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | |
2164 \fi | |
2165 \else | |
2166 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it | |
2167 \fi | |
2168 \fi | |
2169 \endlink | |
2170 \endgroup} | |
2171 | |
69769 | 2172 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. |
2173 % | |
2174 \let\url=\uref | |
2175 | |
37713 | 2176 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. |
2177 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
2178 % |
37713 | 2179 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} |
2180 \ifpdf | |
2181 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} | |
2182 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup | |
2183 \unsepspaces | |
2184 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% | |
2185 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
2186 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi | |
2187 \endlink | |
2188 \endgroup} | |
2189 \else | |
2190 \let\email=\uref | |
2191 \fi | |
2192 | |
2193 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the | |
2194 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and | |
2195 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have | |
2196 % this property, we can check that font parameter. | |
2197 % | |
2198 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } | |
2199 | |
2200 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the | |
2201 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. | |
2202 % | |
2203 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} | |
2204 | |
2205 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} | |
2206 | |
2207 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', | |
2208 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for | |
2209 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. | |
2210 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} | |
2211 | |
2212 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. | |
2213 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font | |
2214 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font | |
2215 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font | |
2216 | |
69769 | 2217 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. |
2218 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for | |
2219 % all-uppercase. | |
2220 % | |
2221 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} | |
2222 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
2223 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% | |
2224 \def\temp{#2}% | |
2225 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
2226 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
2227 \fi | |
2228 } | |
2229 | |
2230 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. | |
2231 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. | |
2232 % | |
2233 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} | |
2234 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
2235 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% | |
2236 \def\temp{#2}% | |
2237 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
2238 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
2239 \fi | |
2240 } | |
2241 | |
2242 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. | |
2243 % | |
37713 | 2244 \def\pounds{{\it\$}} |
2245 | |
69769 | 2246 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. |
2247 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik | |
2248 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and | |
2249 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). | |
2250 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. | |
2251 % | |
2252 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore | |
2253 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular | |
2254 % font height. | |
2255 % | |
2256 % feymr - regular | |
2257 % feymo - slanted | |
2258 % feybr - bold | |
2259 % feybo - bold slanted | |
2260 % | |
2261 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. | |
2262 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. | |
2263 % Hmm. | |
2264 % | |
2265 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? | |
2266 % Hope not. | |
2267 % | |
2268 % | |
2269 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} | |
2270 \def\eurofont{% | |
2271 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in | |
2272 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that | |
2273 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the | |
2274 % font installed. | |
2275 % | |
2276 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale | |
2277 % that to the current nominal size. | |
2278 % | |
2279 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but | |
2280 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. | |
2281 % | |
2282 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% | |
2283 % | |
2284 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename | |
2285 % bold: | |
2286 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize | |
2287 \else | |
2288 % regular: | |
2289 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize | |
2290 \fi | |
2291 \thiseurofont | |
2292 } | |
2293 | |
2294 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really | |
2295 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. | |
2296 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. | |
2297 % | |
2298 \def\registeredsymbol{% | |
2299 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% | |
2300 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% | |
2301 }$% | |
2302 } | |
2303 | |
2304 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: | |
2305 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 | |
2306 % so we'll define it if necessary. | |
2307 % | |
2308 \ifx\Orb\undefined | |
2309 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} | |
2310 \fi | |
2311 | |
37713 | 2312 |
2313 \message{page headings,} | |
2314 | |
2315 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in | |
2316 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc | |
2317 | |
2318 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. | |
2319 \newif\ifseenauthor | |
2320 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage | |
2321 | |
2322 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the | |
2323 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. | |
2324 % | |
2325 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2326 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
2327 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2328 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
2329 | |
69769 | 2330 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
37713 | 2331 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
2332 | |
69769 | 2333 \envdef\titlepage{% |
2334 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. | |
2335 \begingroup | |
2336 \parindent=0pt \textfonts | |
2337 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. | |
2338 \vglue\titlepagetopglue | |
2339 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. | |
2340 \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
2341 % | |
2342 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space | |
2343 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. | |
2344 \let\oldpage = \page | |
2345 \def\page{% | |
37713 | 2346 \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
69769 | 2347 \finishtitlepage |
37713 | 2348 \fi |
2349 \let\page = \oldpage | |
69769 | 2350 \page |
2351 \null | |
2352 }% | |
37713 | 2353 } |
2354 | |
2355 \def\Etitlepage{% | |
69769 | 2356 \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
2357 \finishtitlepage | |
2358 \fi | |
2359 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, | |
2360 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. | |
2361 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page | |
2362 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. | |
2363 \oldpage | |
2364 \endgroup | |
2365 % | |
2366 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are | |
2367 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. | |
2368 \HEADINGSon | |
2369 % | |
2370 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. | |
2371 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2372 \shortcontents | |
2373 \contents | |
2374 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
2375 \global\let\contents = \relax | |
2376 \fi | |
2377 % | |
2378 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2379 \contents | |
2380 \global\let\contents = \relax | |
2381 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
2382 \fi | |
37713 | 2383 } |
2384 | |
2385 \def\finishtitlepage{% | |
69769 | 2386 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize |
2387 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue | |
2388 \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
2389 } | |
2390 | |
2391 %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: | |
2392 | |
2393 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm | |
2394 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} | |
2395 | |
2396 \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines | |
2397 \let\tt=\authortt} | |
2398 | |
2399 \parseargdef\title{% | |
2400 \checkenv\titlepage | |
2401 \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} | |
2402 % print a rule at the page bottom also. | |
2403 \finishedtitlepagefalse | |
2404 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt | |
2405 } | |
2406 | |
2407 \parseargdef\subtitle{% | |
2408 \checkenv\titlepage | |
2409 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% | |
2410 } | |
2411 | |
2412 % @author should come last, but may come many times. | |
2413 % It can also be used inside @quotation. | |
2414 % | |
2415 \parseargdef\author{% | |
2416 \def\temp{\quotation}% | |
2417 \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
2418 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. | |
2419 \else | |
2420 \checkenv\titlepage | |
2421 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi | |
2422 {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% | |
2423 \fi | |
2424 } | |
2425 | |
37713 | 2426 |
2427 %%% Set up page headings and footings. | |
2428 | |
2429 \let\thispage=\folio | |
2430 | |
2431 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages | |
2432 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages | |
2433 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages | |
2434 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages | |
2435 | |
69769 | 2436 % Now make TeX use those variables |
37713 | 2437 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
2438 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} | |
2439 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline | |
2440 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} | |
2441 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax | |
2442 | |
2443 % Commands to set those variables. | |
2444 % For example, this is what @headings on does | |
2445 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter | |
2446 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle | |
2447 % @evenfooting @thisfile|| | |
2448 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile | |
2449 | |
69769 | 2450 |
37713 | 2451 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} |
69769 | 2452 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2453 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
2454 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
2455 | |
37713 | 2456 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} |
69769 | 2457 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2458 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
2459 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
2460 | |
2461 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% | |
37713 | 2462 |
2463 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} | |
69769 | 2464 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2465 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
2466 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
2467 | |
37713 | 2468 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} |
69769 | 2469 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2470 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
37713 | 2471 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% |
2472 % | |
2473 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume | |
2474 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. | |
2475 \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip | |
2476 \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip | |
2477 } | |
2478 | |
69769 | 2479 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} |
2480 | |
37713 | 2481 |
2482 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. | |
2483 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. | |
2484 % @headings off turns them off. | |
2485 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. | |
2486 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
2487 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
2488 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. | |
2489 % By default, they are off at the start of a document, | |
2490 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. | |
2491 | |
2492 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} | |
2493 | |
69769 | 2494 \def\HEADINGSoff{% |
37713 | 2495 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
2496 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} | |
2497 \HEADINGSoff | |
2498 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. | |
2499 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, | |
2500 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document | |
2501 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top | |
2502 % edge of all pages. | |
69769 | 2503 \def\HEADINGSdouble{% |
37713 | 2504 \global\pageno=1 |
2505 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2506 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2507 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
2508 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2509 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
2510 } | |
2511 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2512 | |
2513 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, | |
2514 % page number on top right. | |
69769 | 2515 \def\HEADINGSsingle{% |
37713 | 2516 \global\pageno=1 |
2517 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2518 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2519 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2520 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2521 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2522 } | |
2523 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} | |
2524 | |
2525 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} | |
2526 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter | |
2527 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% | |
2528 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2529 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2530 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
2531 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2532 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
2533 } | |
2534 | |
2535 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} | |
2536 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% | |
2537 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2538 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2539 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2540 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2541 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2542 } | |
2543 | |
2544 % Subroutines used in generating headings | |
2545 % This produces Day Month Year style of output. | |
2546 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set | |
2547 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). | |
2548 \ifx\today\undefined | |
2549 \def\today{% | |
2550 \number\day\space | |
2551 \ifcase\month | |
2552 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr | |
2553 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug | |
2554 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec | |
2555 \fi | |
2556 \space\number\year} | |
2557 \fi | |
2558 | |
2559 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. | |
2560 % It generates no output of its own. | |
2561 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} | |
69769 | 2562 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} |
37713 | 2563 |
2564 | |
2565 \message{tables,} | |
69769 | 2566 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). |
37713 | 2567 |
2568 % default indentation of table text | |
2569 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in | |
2570 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text | |
2571 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in | |
2572 % margin between end of table item and start of table text. | |
2573 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in | |
2574 | |
2575 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin | |
2576 \newdimen\itemmax | |
2577 | |
69769 | 2578 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with |
37713 | 2579 % these defs. |
2580 % They also define \itemindex | |
2581 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). | |
2582 | |
2583 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip | |
2584 | |
2585 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} | |
2586 | |
2587 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
2588 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
2589 | |
2590 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % | |
2591 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
2592 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent | |
69769 | 2593 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% |
37713 | 2594 \itemindex{#1}% |
2595 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. | |
2596 % | |
2597 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line | |
2598 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that | |
2599 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next | |
2600 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the | |
2601 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. | |
2602 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax | |
2603 % | |
2604 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, | |
2605 % but leave it ragged-right. | |
2606 \begingroup | |
2607 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent | |
2608 \advance\hsize by\tableindent | |
2609 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil | |
2610 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par | |
2611 \endgroup | |
2612 % | |
2613 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the | |
2614 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. | |
2615 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip | |
2616 % | |
69769 | 2617 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if |
2618 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no | |
2619 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would | |
2620 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this | |
2621 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert | |
2622 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. | |
2623 % | |
2624 \penalty 10001 | |
37713 | 2625 \endgroup |
2626 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse | |
2627 \else | |
2628 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the | |
2629 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. | |
2630 \noindent | |
2631 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in | |
2632 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and | |
2633 % eventually be printed. | |
2634 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent | |
2635 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 | |
2636 \unhbox0 | |
2637 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 | |
2638 \endgroup | |
2639 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue | |
2640 \fi | |
2641 } | |
2642 | |
69769 | 2643 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} |
2644 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} | |
37713 | 2645 |
2646 % @table, @ftable, @vtable. | |
69769 | 2647 \envdef\table{% |
2648 \let\itemindex\gobble | |
2649 \tablecheck{table}% | |
2650 } | |
2651 \envdef\ftable{% | |
2652 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% | |
2653 \tablecheck{ftable}% | |
2654 } | |
2655 \envdef\vtable{% | |
2656 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% | |
2657 \tablecheck{vtable}% | |
2658 } | |
2659 \def\tablecheck#1{% | |
2660 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active | |
2661 \endgroup | |
2662 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is | |
2663 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
2664 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% | |
2665 \else | |
2666 \let\next\tablex | |
2667 \fi | |
2668 \next | |
2669 } | |
2670 \def\tablex#1{% | |
2671 \def\itemindicate{#1}% | |
2672 \parsearg\tabley | |
2673 } | |
2674 \def\tabley#1{% | |
2675 {% | |
2676 \makevalueexpandable | |
2677 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% | |
2678 \expandafter | |
2679 }\temp \endtablez | |
2680 } | |
2681 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% | |
2682 \aboveenvbreak | |
2683 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi | |
2684 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi | |
2685 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi | |
2686 \itemmax=\tableindent | |
2687 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
2688 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent | |
2689 \exdentamount=\tableindent | |
2690 \parindent = 0pt | |
2691 \parskip = \smallskipamount | |
2692 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
2693 \let\item = \internalBitem | |
2694 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx | |
2695 } | |
2696 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} | |
2697 \let\Eftable\Etable | |
2698 \let\Evtable\Etable | |
2699 \let\Eitemize\Etable | |
2700 \let\Eenumerate\Etable | |
37713 | 2701 |
2702 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize | |
2703 | |
2704 \newcount \itemno | |
2705 | |
69769 | 2706 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} |
2707 | |
2708 \def\doitemize#1{% | |
2709 \aboveenvbreak | |
2710 \itemmax=\itemindent | |
2711 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
2712 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent | |
2713 \exdentamount=\itemindent | |
2714 \parindent=0pt | |
2715 \parskip=\smallskipamount | |
2716 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
2717 \def\itemcontents{#1}% | |
2718 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. | |
2719 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi | |
2720 \let\item=\itemizeitem | |
2721 } | |
2722 | |
2723 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. | |
2724 % | |
2725 \def\itemizeitem{% | |
2726 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations | |
2727 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break | |
2728 {% | |
2729 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a | |
2730 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have | |
2731 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero | |
2732 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the | |
2733 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there | |
2734 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much | |
2735 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least | |
2736 % that's the theory. | |
2737 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi | |
2738 \noindent | |
2739 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% | |
2740 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. | |
2741 \flushcr | |
2742 } | |
37713 | 2743 |
2744 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in | |
2745 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. | |
2746 % | |
2747 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% | |
2748 | |
2749 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, | |
2750 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No | |
2751 % argument is the same as `1'. | |
2752 % | |
69769 | 2753 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} |
37713 | 2754 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% |
2755 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. | |
2756 \def\thearg{#1}% | |
2757 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi | |
2758 % | |
2759 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a | |
2760 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. | |
2761 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. | |
2762 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at | |
2763 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) | |
2764 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark | |
2765 \ifx\rest\empty | |
2766 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. | |
2767 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. | |
2768 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and | |
2769 % not equal to itself. | |
2770 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. | |
2771 % | |
2772 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from | |
2773 % continuing to look for a <number>. | |
2774 % | |
2775 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax | |
2776 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) | |
2777 \else | |
2778 % It's a letter. | |
2779 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax | |
2780 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter | |
2781 \else | |
2782 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter | |
2783 \fi | |
2784 \fi | |
2785 \else | |
2786 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. | |
2787 \numericenumerate | |
2788 \fi | |
2789 } | |
2790 | |
2791 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is | |
2792 % given in \thearg. | |
2793 % | |
2794 \def\numericenumerate{% | |
2795 \itemno = \thearg | |
2796 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% | |
2797 } | |
2798 | |
2799 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
2800 \def\lowercaseenumerate{% | |
2801 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
2802 \startenumeration{% | |
2803 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
2804 \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
2805 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
2806 alphabet}% | |
2807 \fi | |
2808 \char\lccode\itemno | |
2809 }% | |
2810 } | |
2811 | |
2812 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
2813 \def\uppercaseenumerate{% | |
2814 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
2815 \startenumeration{% | |
2816 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
2817 \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
2818 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
2819 alphabet} | |
2820 \fi | |
2821 \char\uccode\itemno | |
2822 }% | |
2823 } | |
2824 | |
69769 | 2825 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the |
37713 | 2826 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in |
2827 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. | |
2828 % | |
2829 \def\startenumeration#1{% | |
2830 \advance\itemno by -1 | |
69769 | 2831 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr |
37713 | 2832 } |
2833 | |
2834 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg | |
2835 % to @enumerate. | |
2836 % | |
2837 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} | |
2838 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} | |
2839 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
2840 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
2841 | |
2842 | |
2843 % @multitable macros | |
2844 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 | |
2845 % | |
2846 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. | |
2847 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width | |
2848 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, | |
2849 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. | |
2850 | |
2851 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. | |
2852 | |
2853 % To make preamble: | |
2854 % | |
2855 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: | |
2856 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 | |
2857 % @item ... | |
2858 % | |
2859 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total | |
2860 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many | |
2861 % columns as desired. | |
2862 | |
2863 | |
2864 % Or use a template: | |
2865 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
2866 % @item ... | |
2867 % using the widest term desired in each column. | |
2868 | |
2869 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column | |
2870 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's | |
2871 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, | |
2872 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. | |
2873 | |
69769 | 2874 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt |
2875 % if they are. | |
37713 | 2876 |
2877 % Sample multitable: | |
2878 | |
2879 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
2880 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col | |
2881 % @item | |
2882 % first col stuff | |
2883 % @tab | |
2884 % second col stuff | |
2885 % @tab | |
2886 % third col | |
2887 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff | |
2888 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. | |
2889 % | |
2890 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. | |
2891 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. | |
2892 % @end multitable | |
2893 | |
2894 % Default dimensions may be reset by user. | |
2895 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. | |
2896 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. | |
2897 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. | |
2898 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline | |
2899 % to baseline. | |
2900 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. | |
2901 % | |
2902 \newskip\multitableparskip | |
2903 \newskip\multitableparindent | |
2904 \newdimen\multitablecolspace | |
2905 \newskip\multitablelinespace | |
2906 \multitableparskip=0pt | |
2907 \multitableparindent=6pt | |
2908 \multitablecolspace=12pt | |
2909 \multitablelinespace=0pt | |
2910 | |
2911 % Macros used to set up halign preamble: | |
2912 % | |
2913 \let\endsetuptable\relax | |
2914 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} | |
2915 \let\columnfractions\relax | |
2916 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} | |
2917 \newif\ifsetpercent | |
2918 | |
69769 | 2919 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might |
2920 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. | |
2921 % | |
2922 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% | |
37713 | 2923 \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
69769 | 2924 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% |
37713 | 2925 \setuptable |
2926 } | |
2927 | |
2928 \newcount\colcount | |
2929 \def\setuptable#1{% | |
2930 \def\firstarg{#1}% | |
2931 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable | |
2932 \let\go = \relax | |
2933 \else | |
2934 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions | |
2935 \global\setpercenttrue | |
2936 \else | |
2937 \ifsetpercent | |
2938 \let\go\pickupwholefraction | |
2939 \else | |
2940 \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
69769 | 2941 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a |
2942 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. | |
37713 | 2943 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
2944 \fi | |
2945 \fi | |
2946 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction | |
2947 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so | |
2948 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. | |
2949 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% | |
2950 \else | |
2951 \let\go = \setuptable | |
2952 \fi% | |
2953 \fi | |
2954 \go | |
2955 } | |
2956 | |
69769 | 2957 % multitable-only commands. |
2958 % | |
2959 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. | |
2960 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group | |
2961 % of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. | |
2962 \def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% | |
2963 % | |
2964 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template | |
2965 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until | |
2966 % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. | |
2967 % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. | |
2968 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% | |
37713 | 2969 |
2970 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: | |
2971 % | |
69769 | 2972 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. |
2973 % | |
2974 \envdef\multitable{% | |
37713 | 2975 \vskip\parskip |
69769 | 2976 \startsavinginserts |
2977 % | |
2978 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. | |
2979 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries | |
2980 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka | |
2981 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. | |
2982 \def\item{\crcr}% | |
2983 % | |
37713 | 2984 \tolerance=9500 |
2985 \hbadness=9500 | |
2986 \setmultitablespacing | |
2987 \parskip=\multitableparskip | |
2988 \parindent=\multitableparindent | |
2989 \overfullrule=0pt | |
2990 \global\colcount=0 | |
69769 | 2991 % |
2992 \everycr = {% | |
2993 \noalign{% | |
2994 \global\everytab={}% | |
2995 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. | |
2996 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. | |
2997 \checkinserts | |
2998 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. | |
2999 %\filbreak | |
3000 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the | |
3001 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the | |
3002 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. | |
3003 }% | |
3004 }% | |
3005 % | |
3006 \parsearg\domultitable | |
3007 } | |
3008 \def\domultitable#1{% | |
37713 | 3009 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: |
3010 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable | |
3011 % | |
3012 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will | |
3013 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. | |
3014 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and | |
3015 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. | |
69769 | 3016 \halign\bgroup &% |
3017 \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
3018 \multistrut | |
3019 \vtop{% | |
3020 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: | |
3021 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname | |
3022 % | |
3023 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other | |
3024 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after | |
3025 % the first one. | |
3026 % | |
3027 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace | |
3028 % to the width of each template entry. | |
3029 % | |
3030 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will | |
3031 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip | |
3032 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at | |
3033 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. | |
3034 % | |
3035 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. | |
3036 \rightskip=0pt | |
3037 \ifnum\colcount=1 | |
3038 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. | |
3039 \advance\hsize by\leftskip | |
3040 \else | |
3041 \ifsetpercent \else | |
3042 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize | |
3043 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. | |
3044 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace | |
3045 \fi | |
3046 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: | |
3047 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace | |
3048 \fi | |
3049 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious | |
3050 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the | |
3051 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. | |
3052 % For example: | |
3053 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 | |
3054 % @item @code{#} | |
3055 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. | |
3056 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively | |
3057 % marking characters. | |
3058 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut | |
3059 }\cr | |
3060 } | |
3061 \def\Emultitable{% | |
3062 \crcr | |
3063 \egroup % end the \halign | |
3064 \global\setpercentfalse | |
3065 } | |
3066 | |
3067 \def\setmultitablespacing{% | |
3068 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing | |
3069 % | |
3070 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in | |
3071 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on | |
3072 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. | |
3073 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. | |
37713 | 3074 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt |
3075 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip | |
3076 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 | |
69769 | 3077 \fi |
37713 | 3078 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of |
3079 %% table. If not, do nothing. | |
3080 %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. | |
3081 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace | |
3082 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
3083 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
3084 %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
3085 \fi% | |
3086 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt | |
3087 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
3088 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
3089 %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
3090 \fi} | |
3091 | |
3092 | |
3093 \message{conditionals,} | |
69769 | 3094 |
3095 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, | |
3096 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't | |
3097 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we | |
3098 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't | |
3099 % attempt to close an environment group. | |
3100 % | |
3101 \def\makecond#1{% | |
3102 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax | |
3103 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 | |
3104 } | |
3105 \makecond{iftex} | |
3106 \makecond{ifnotdocbook} | |
3107 \makecond{ifnothtml} | |
3108 \makecond{ifnotinfo} | |
3109 \makecond{ifnotplaintext} | |
3110 \makecond{ifnotxml} | |
3111 | |
3112 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. | |
3113 % | |
3114 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} | |
3115 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} | |
3116 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} | |
3117 \def\html{\doignore{html}} | |
3118 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} | |
47284 | 3119 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
37713 | 3120 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
69769 | 3121 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} |
47284 | 3122 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} |
69769 | 3123 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} |
3124 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} | |
37713 | 3125 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
69769 | 3126 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} |
3127 | |
3128 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. | |
3129 % | |
3130 % A count to remember the depth of nesting. | |
3131 \newcount\doignorecount | |
3132 | |
37713 | 3133 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
69769 | 3134 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: |
3135 \obeylines | |
3136 \catcode`\@ = \other | |
3137 \catcode`\{ = \other | |
3138 \catcode`\} = \other | |
37713 | 3139 % |
3140 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. | |
69769 | 3141 \spaceisspace |
3142 % | |
3143 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. | |
3144 \doignorecount = 0 | |
3145 % | |
3146 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. | |
3147 \dodoignore{#1}% | |
3148 } | |
3149 | |
3150 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. | |
3151 \obeylines % | |
3152 % | |
3153 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% | |
3154 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. | |
3155 % | |
3156 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. | |
3157 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% | |
3158 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% | |
3159 % | |
3160 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a | |
3161 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for | |
3162 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) | |
3163 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% | |
3164 % | |
3165 % And now expand that command. | |
3166 \doignoretext ^^M% | |
3167 }% | |
3168 } | |
3169 | |
3170 \def\doignoreyyy#1{% | |
3171 \def\temp{#1}% | |
3172 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. | |
3173 \let\next\doignoretextzzz | |
3174 \else % Found a nested condition, ... | |
3175 \advance\doignorecount by 1 | |
3176 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. | |
3177 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). | |
47284 | 3178 \fi |
69769 | 3179 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. |
3180 } | |
3181 | |
3182 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". | |
3183 % | |
3184 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% | |
3185 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. | |
3186 \let\next\enddoignore | |
3187 \else % Still inside a nested condition. | |
3188 \advance\doignorecount by -1 | |
3189 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. | |
3190 \fi | |
3191 \next | |
3192 } | |
3193 | |
3194 % Finish off ignored text. | |
3195 { \obeylines% | |
3196 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim | |
3197 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional | |
3198 % would result in a blank line in the output. | |
3199 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% | |
3200 } | |
3201 | |
37713 | 3202 |
3203 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. | |
3204 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. | |
3205 % | |
3206 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be | |
3207 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our | |
3208 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we | |
69769 | 3209 % didn't need it. |
3210 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. | |
3211 % | |
3212 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} | |
37713 | 3213 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
69769 | 3214 {% |
3215 \makevalueexpandable | |
3216 \def\temp{#2}% | |
3217 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% | |
3218 \ifx\temp\empty | |
3219 \next{}% | |
3220 \else | |
3221 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz | |
3222 \fi | |
3223 }% | |
3224 } | |
3225 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. | |
3226 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} | |
37713 | 3227 |
3228 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. | |
3229 % | |
69769 | 3230 \parseargdef\clear{% |
3231 {% | |
3232 \makevalueexpandable | |
3233 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax | |
3234 }% | |
3235 } | |
37713 | 3236 |
3237 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. | |
69769 | 3238 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} |
3239 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} | |
37713 | 3240 { |
69769 | 3241 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active |
3242 % | |
3243 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% | |
3244 \let\value = \expandablevalue | |
3245 % We don't want these characters active, ... | |
3246 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other | |
3247 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if | |
3248 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. | |
3249 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. | |
3250 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore | |
3251 } | |
3252 } | |
37713 | 3253 |
3254 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's | |
69769 | 3255 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). |
3256 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since | |
3257 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the | |
3258 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain | |
3259 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work | |
3260 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). | |
37713 | 3261 % |
3262 \def\expandablevalue#1{% | |
3263 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | |
3264 {[No value for ``#1'']}% | |
69769 | 3265 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% |
37713 | 3266 \else |
3267 \csname SET#1\endcsname | |
3268 \fi | |
3269 } | |
3270 | |
3271 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined | |
3272 % with @set. | |
3273 % | |
69769 | 3274 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. |
3275 % | |
3276 \makecond{ifset} | |
3277 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} | |
3278 \def\doifset#1#2{% | |
3279 {% | |
3280 \makevalueexpandable | |
3281 \let\next=\empty | |
3282 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax | |
3283 #1% If not set, redefine \next. | |
3284 \fi | |
3285 \expandafter | |
3286 }\next | |
3287 } | |
3288 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} | |
37713 | 3289 |
3290 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been | |
3291 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. | |
3292 % | |
69769 | 3293 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the |
3294 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, | |
3295 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. | |
3296 % | |
3297 \makecond{ifclear} | |
3298 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} | |
3299 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} | |
3300 | |
3301 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file | |
3302 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. | |
3303 \let\dircategory=\comment | |
37713 | 3304 |
3305 % @defininfoenclose. | |
3306 \let\definfoenclose=\comment | |
3307 | |
3308 | |
3309 \message{indexing,} | |
3310 % Index generation facilities | |
3311 | |
3312 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite | |
69769 | 3313 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. |
3314 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} | |
37713 | 3315 |
3316 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. | |
3317 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that | |
3318 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. | |
3319 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for | |
3320 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. | |
3321 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long | |
3322 % for the sake of vms. | |
3323 % | |
3324 \def\newindex#1{% | |
3325 \iflinks | |
3326 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
3327 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file | |
3328 \fi | |
3329 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index | |
3330 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} | |
3331 } | |
3332 | |
3333 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} | |
3334 % | |
3335 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} | |
3336 | |
3337 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. | |
3338 % | |
3339 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} | |
3340 % | |
3341 \def\newcodeindex#1{% | |
3342 \iflinks | |
3343 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
3344 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 | |
3345 \fi | |
3346 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% | |
3347 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% | |
3348 } | |
3349 | |
3350 | |
3351 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. | |
3352 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
3353 % |
37713 | 3354 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
3355 % inside @code. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
3356 % |
37713 | 3357 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} |
3358 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} | |
3359 | |
3360 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), | |
3361 % #3 the target index (bar). | |
3362 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% | |
3363 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up | |
3364 % closing the target index. | |
3365 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined | |
3366 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the | |
3367 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. | |
3368 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname | |
3369 \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 | |
3370 \fi | |
3371 % redefine \fooindfile: | |
3372 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname | |
3373 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp | |
3374 % redefine \fooindex: | |
3375 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% | |
3376 } | |
3377 | |
3378 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. | |
3379 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, | |
3380 % and it is "foo", the name of the index. | |
3381 | |
3382 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. | |
3383 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. | |
3384 | |
3385 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} | |
3386 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. | |
3387 | |
3388 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} | |
3389 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} | |
3390 | |
3391 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. | |
3392 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} | |
3393 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} | |
3394 | |
69769 | 3395 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. |
3396 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, | |
3397 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
3398 % |
37713 | 3399 \def\indexdummies{% |
69769 | 3400 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. |
3401 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. | |
3402 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% | |
71093 | 3403 % |
69769 | 3404 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. |
3405 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes | |
3406 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. | |
3407 \let\{ = \mylbrace | |
3408 \let\} = \myrbrace | |
3409 % | |
71093 | 3410 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is |
3411 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts | |
3412 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, | |
3413 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput | |
3414 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput | |
3415 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that | |
3416 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it | |
3417 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that | |
3418 % is still getting written without apparent harm. | |
3419 % | |
3420 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to | |
3421 % help-texinfo, 22may06): | |
3422 % @macro funindex {WORD} | |
3423 % @findex xyz | |
3424 % @end macro | |
3425 % ... | |
3426 % @funindex commtest | |
3427 % | |
3428 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. | |
3429 % | |
3430 % Sample whatsit resulting: | |
3431 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} | |
3432 % | |
3433 % So: | |
3434 \let\endinput = \empty | |
3435 % | |
69769 | 3436 % Do the redefinitions. |
3437 \commondummies | |
3438 } | |
3439 | |
3440 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to | |
3441 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of | |
3442 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, | |
3443 % this will be simpler. | |
3444 % | |
3445 \def\atdummies{% | |
3446 \def\@{@@}% | |
3447 \def\ {@ }% | |
3448 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd | |
3449 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd | |
3450 % | |
3451 % Do the redefinitions. | |
3452 \commondummies | |
3453 \otherbackslash | |
3454 } | |
3455 | |
3456 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. | |
3457 % | |
3458 \def\commondummies{% | |
3459 % | |
3460 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively | |
3461 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, | |
3462 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for | |
3463 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word | |
3464 % from whatever follows. | |
3465 % | |
3466 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the | |
3467 % space. | |
3468 % | |
3469 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and | |
3470 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then | |
3471 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). | |
3472 % | |
3473 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% | |
3474 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% | |
3475 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter | |
3476 % | |
3477 \commondummiesnofonts | |
3478 % | |
3479 \definedummyletter\_% | |
3480 % | |
3481 % Non-English letters. | |
3482 \definedummyword\AA | |
3483 \definedummyword\AE | |
3484 \definedummyword\L | |
3485 \definedummyword\OE | |
3486 \definedummyword\O | |
3487 \definedummyword\aa | |
3488 \definedummyword\ae | |
3489 \definedummyword\l | |
3490 \definedummyword\oe | |
3491 \definedummyword\o | |
3492 \definedummyword\ss | |
3493 \definedummyword\exclamdown | |
3494 \definedummyword\questiondown | |
3495 \definedummyword\ordf | |
3496 \definedummyword\ordm | |
3497 % | |
3498 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. | |
3499 \definedummyword\bf | |
3500 \definedummyword\gtr | |
3501 \definedummyword\hat | |
3502 \definedummyword\less | |
3503 \definedummyword\sf | |
3504 \definedummyword\sl | |
3505 \definedummyword\tclose | |
3506 \definedummyword\tt | |
3507 % | |
3508 \definedummyword\LaTeX | |
3509 \definedummyword\TeX | |
3510 % | |
3511 % Assorted special characters. | |
3512 \definedummyword\bullet | |
3513 \definedummyword\comma | |
3514 \definedummyword\copyright | |
3515 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol | |
3516 \definedummyword\dots | |
3517 \definedummyword\enddots | |
3518 \definedummyword\equiv | |
3519 \definedummyword\error | |
3520 \definedummyword\euro | |
3521 \definedummyword\expansion | |
3522 \definedummyword\minus | |
3523 \definedummyword\pounds | |
3524 \definedummyword\point | |
3525 \definedummyword\print | |
3526 \definedummyword\result | |
3527 % | |
3528 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. | |
3529 \macrolist | |
3530 % | |
3531 \normalturnoffactive | |
3532 % | |
3533 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any | |
3534 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. | |
3535 \makevalueexpandable | |
3536 } | |
3537 | |
3538 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. | |
3539 % | |
3540 \def\commondummiesnofonts{% | |
3541 % Control letters and accents. | |
3542 \definedummyletter\!% | |
3543 \definedummyaccent\"% | |
3544 \definedummyaccent\'% | |
3545 \definedummyletter\*% | |
3546 \definedummyaccent\,% | |
3547 \definedummyletter\.% | |
3548 \definedummyletter\/% | |
3549 \definedummyletter\:% | |
3550 \definedummyaccent\=% | |
3551 \definedummyletter\?% | |
3552 \definedummyaccent\^% | |
3553 \definedummyaccent\`% | |
3554 \definedummyaccent\~% | |
3555 \definedummyword\u | |
3556 \definedummyword\v | |
3557 \definedummyword\H | |
3558 \definedummyword\dotaccent | |
3559 \definedummyword\ringaccent | |
3560 \definedummyword\tieaccent | |
3561 \definedummyword\ubaraccent | |
3562 \definedummyword\udotaccent | |
3563 \definedummyword\dotless | |
3564 % | |
3565 % Texinfo font commands. | |
3566 \definedummyword\b | |
3567 \definedummyword\i | |
3568 \definedummyword\r | |
3569 \definedummyword\sc | |
3570 \definedummyword\t | |
3571 % | |
3572 % Commands that take arguments. | |
3573 \definedummyword\acronym | |
3574 \definedummyword\cite | |
3575 \definedummyword\code | |
3576 \definedummyword\command | |
3577 \definedummyword\dfn | |
3578 \definedummyword\emph | |
3579 \definedummyword\env | |
3580 \definedummyword\file | |
3581 \definedummyword\kbd | |
3582 \definedummyword\key | |
3583 \definedummyword\math | |
3584 \definedummyword\option | |
3585 \definedummyword\pxref | |
3586 \definedummyword\ref | |
3587 \definedummyword\samp | |
3588 \definedummyword\strong | |
3589 \definedummyword\tie | |
3590 \definedummyword\uref | |
3591 \definedummyword\url | |
3592 \definedummyword\var | |
3593 \definedummyword\verb | |
3594 \definedummyword\w | |
3595 \definedummyword\xref | |
3596 } | |
3597 | |
3598 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index | |
3599 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all | |
3600 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string | |
3601 % would be for a given command (usually its argument). | |
3602 % | |
37713 | 3603 \def\indexnofonts{% |
69769 | 3604 % Accent commands should become @asis. |
3605 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% | |
3606 % We can just ignore other control letters. | |
3607 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% | |
3608 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. | |
3609 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent | |
3610 % | |
3611 \commondummiesnofonts | |
3612 % | |
3613 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command | |
3614 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. | |
3615 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. | |
3616 %\let\tt=\asis | |
3617 % | |
3618 \def\ { }% | |
3619 \def\@{@}% | |
3620 % how to handle braces? | |
3621 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% | |
3622 % | |
3623 % Non-English letters. | |
3624 \def\AA{AA}% | |
3625 \def\AE{AE}% | |
3626 \def\L{L}% | |
3627 \def\OE{OE}% | |
3628 \def\O{O}% | |
3629 \def\aa{aa}% | |
3630 \def\ae{ae}% | |
3631 \def\l{l}% | |
3632 \def\oe{oe}% | |
3633 \def\o{o}% | |
3634 \def\ss{ss}% | |
3635 \def\exclamdown{!}% | |
3636 \def\questiondown{?}% | |
3637 \def\ordf{a}% | |
3638 \def\ordm{o}% | |
3639 % | |
3640 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% | |
3641 \def\TeX{TeX}% | |
3642 % | |
3643 % Assorted special characters. | |
3644 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) | |
3645 \def\bullet{bullet}% | |
3646 \def\comma{,}% | |
3647 \def\copyright{copyright}% | |
3648 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% | |
3649 \def\dots{...}% | |
3650 \def\enddots{...}% | |
3651 \def\equiv{==}% | |
3652 \def\error{error}% | |
3653 \def\euro{euro}% | |
3654 \def\expansion{==>}% | |
3655 \def\minus{-}% | |
3656 \def\pounds{pounds}% | |
3657 \def\point{.}% | |
3658 \def\print{-|}% | |
3659 \def\result{=>}% | |
3660 % | |
3661 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). | |
3662 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. | |
3663 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up | |
3664 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry | |
3665 % that starts with \. | |
3666 % | |
3667 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them | |
3668 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that | |
3669 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. | |
3670 % | |
3671 \macrolist | |
3672 } | |
37713 | 3673 |
3674 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. | |
3675 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? | |
3676 | |
3677 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. | |
69769 | 3678 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. |
3679 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} | |
37713 | 3680 |
3681 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. | |
3682 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- | |
69769 | 3683 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception |
3684 % is with most defuns, which call us directly). | |
37713 | 3685 % |
3686 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% | |
69769 | 3687 \iflinks |
3688 {% | |
3689 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). | |
3690 \toks0 = {#2}% | |
3691 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. | |
3692 \def\thirdarg{#3}% | |
3693 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else | |
3694 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% | |
3695 \fi | |
3696 % | |
3697 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% | |
3698 % | |
3699 \ifvmode | |
3700 \dosubindsanitize | |
3701 \else | |
3702 \dosubindwrite | |
3703 \fi | |
3704 }% | |
3705 \fi | |
3706 } | |
3707 | |
3708 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: | |
3709 % | |
3710 \def\dosubindwrite{% | |
37713 | 3711 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
3712 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else | |
69769 | 3713 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% |
37713 | 3714 \fi |
69769 | 3715 % |
3716 % Remember, we are within a group. | |
3717 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage | |
3718 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now | |
3719 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. | |
3720 % | |
3721 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to | |
3722 % get the string to sort by. | |
3723 {\indexnofonts | |
3724 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion | |
3725 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% | |
3726 }% | |
3727 % | |
3728 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and | |
3729 % the original text, including any font commands. We write | |
3730 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the | |
3731 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s | |
3732 % sorted result. | |
3733 \edef\temp{% | |
3734 \write\writeto{% | |
3735 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% | |
37713 | 3736 }% |
69769 | 3737 \temp |
3738 } | |
3739 | |
3740 % Take care of unwanted page breaks: | |
3741 % | |
3742 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it | |
3743 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting | |
3744 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the | |
3745 % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences | |
3746 % like this: | |
3747 % @end defun | |
3748 % @tindex whatever | |
3749 % @defun ... | |
3750 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the | |
3751 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of | |
3752 % the previous defun. | |
3753 % | |
3754 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We | |
3755 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. | |
3756 % | |
3757 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. | |
3758 % | |
3759 % But wait, there is a catch there: | |
3760 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not | |
3761 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts | |
3762 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual | |
3763 % representation of the skip. | |
3764 % | |
3765 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that | |
3766 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). | |
3767 % | |
3768 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} | |
3769 % | |
3770 % ..., ready, GO: | |
3771 % | |
3772 \def\dosubindsanitize{% | |
3773 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. | |
3774 \skip0 = \lastskip | |
3775 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% | |
3776 \count255 = \lastpenalty | |
3777 % | |
3778 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a | |
3779 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this | |
3780 % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a | |
3781 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential | |
3782 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. | |
3783 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
3784 \else | |
3785 \vskip-\skip0 | |
3786 \fi | |
3787 % | |
3788 \dosubindwrite | |
3789 % | |
3790 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
3791 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and | |
3792 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want | |
3793 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various | |
3794 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any | |
3795 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: | |
3796 % | |
3797 % @deffn deffn-whatever | |
3798 % @vindex index-whatever | |
3799 % Description. | |
3800 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit | |
3801 % and the "Description." paragraph. | |
3802 \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi | |
3803 \else | |
3804 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, | |
3805 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item | |
3806 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. | |
3807 \nobreak\vskip\skip0 | |
3808 \fi | |
37713 | 3809 } |
3810 | |
3811 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like | |
3812 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} | |
3813 % or | |
3814 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} | |
3815 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files | |
3816 % containing these kinds of lines: | |
3817 % \initial {c} | |
3818 % before the first topic whose initial is c | |
3819 % \entry {topic}{pagelist} | |
3820 % for a topic that is used without subtopics | |
3821 % \primary {topic} | |
3822 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics | |
3823 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} | |
3824 % for each subtopic. | |
3825 | |
3826 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands | |
3827 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. | |
3828 | |
3829 \def\findex {\fnindex} | |
3830 \def\kindex {\kyindex} | |
3831 \def\cindex {\cpindex} | |
3832 \def\vindex {\vrindex} | |
3833 \def\tindex {\tpindex} | |
3834 \def\pindex {\pgindex} | |
3835 | |
3836 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} | |
3837 {\obeylines % | |
3838 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % | |
3839 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} | |
3840 | |
3841 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. | |
3842 | |
3843 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. | |
3844 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). | |
3845 % | |
69769 | 3846 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup |
37713 | 3847 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% |
3848 % | |
3849 \smallfonts \rm | |
3850 \tolerance = 9500 | |
69769 | 3851 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. |
37713 | 3852 % |
3853 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. | |
3854 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains | |
3855 % \initial {@} | |
3856 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces | |
3857 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). | |
3858 \catcode`\@ = 11 | |
3859 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s | |
3860 \ifeof 1 | |
3861 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, | |
3862 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the | |
3863 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure | |
3864 % there is some text. | |
3865 \putwordIndexNonexistent | |
3866 \else | |
3867 % | |
3868 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof | |
3869 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so | |
3870 % it can discover if there is anything in it. | |
3871 \read 1 to \temp | |
3872 \ifeof 1 | |
3873 \putwordIndexIsEmpty | |
3874 \else | |
3875 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape | |
3876 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change | |
3877 % to make right now. | |
69769 | 3878 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% |
37713 | 3879 \catcode`\\ = 0 |
3880 \escapechar = `\\ | |
3881 \begindoublecolumns | |
3882 \input \jobname.#1s | |
3883 \enddoublecolumns | |
3884 \fi | |
3885 \fi | |
3886 \closein 1 | |
3887 \endgroup} | |
3888 | |
3889 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. | |
3890 % Change them to control the appearance of the index. | |
3891 | |
3892 \def\initial#1{{% | |
3893 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. | |
3894 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt | |
3895 % | |
3896 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. | |
3897 \removelastskip | |
3898 % | |
3899 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. | |
69769 | 3900 \nobreak |
3901 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip | |
3902 \penalty 0 | |
3903 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip | |
37713 | 3904 % |
3905 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of | |
3906 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column | |
3907 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch | |
3908 % we need before each entry, but it's better. | |
3909 % | |
3910 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. | |
3911 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip | |
3912 \leftline{\secbf #1}% | |
3913 % Do our best not to break after the initial. | |
3914 \nobreak | |
69769 | 3915 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip |
37713 | 3916 }} |
3917 | |
69769 | 3918 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and |
3919 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index | |
3920 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. | |
3921 % | |
3922 % A straightforward implementation would start like this: | |
3923 % \def\entry#1#2{... | |
3924 % But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to | |
3925 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- | |
3926 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. | |
3927 % | |
3928 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. | |
3929 % --kasal, 21nov03 | |
3930 \def\entry{% | |
3931 \begingroup | |
3932 % | |
3933 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't | |
3934 % affect previous text. | |
3935 \par | |
3936 % | |
3937 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. | |
3938 \parfillskip = 0in | |
3939 % | |
3940 % No extra space above this paragraph. | |
3941 \parskip = 0in | |
3942 % | |
3943 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. | |
3944 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 | |
3945 % | |
3946 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number | |
3947 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the | |
3948 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large | |
3949 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across | |
3950 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. | |
3951 % | |
3952 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start | |
3953 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. | |
3954 \hangindent = 2em | |
3955 % | |
3956 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line | |
3957 % with blank space. | |
3958 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil | |
37713 | 3959 % |
69769 | 3960 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing |
3961 % columns. | |
3962 \vskip 0pt plus1pt | |
3963 % | |
3964 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): | |
3965 \afterassignment\doentry | |
3966 \let\temp = | |
3967 } | |
3968 \def\doentry{% | |
3969 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. | |
3970 \noindent | |
3971 \aftergroup\finishentry | |
3972 % And now comes the text of the entry. | |
3973 } | |
3974 \def\finishentry#1{% | |
3975 % #1 is the page number. | |
37713 | 3976 % |
69769 | 3977 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if |
3978 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be | |
3979 % cursed by a Unix daemon. | |
3980 \def\tempa{{\rm }}% | |
3981 \def\tempb{#1}% | |
3982 \edef\tempc{\tempa}% | |
3983 \edef\tempd{\tempb}% | |
3984 \ifx\tempc\tempd | |
3985 \ % | |
37713 | 3986 \else |
69769 | 3987 % |
3988 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out | |
3989 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the | |
3990 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) | |
3991 \hfil\penalty50 | |
3992 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. | |
3993 % | |
3994 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as | |
3995 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull | |
3996 % \hbox ensues. | |
3997 \ifpdf | |
3998 \pdfgettoks#1.% | |
3999 \ \the\toksA | |
4000 \else | |
4001 \ #1% | |
4002 \fi | |
37713 | 4003 \fi |
69769 | 4004 \par |
4005 \endgroup | |
4006 } | |
37713 | 4007 |
71493 | 4008 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. |
37713 | 4009 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders |
71493 | 4010 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} |
37713 | 4011 |
4012 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} | |
4013 | |
4014 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm | |
4015 \def\secondary#1#2{{% | |
4016 \parfillskip=0in | |
4017 \parskip=0in | |
4018 \hangindent=1in | |
4019 \hangafter=1 | |
4020 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill | |
4021 \ifpdf | |
4022 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. | |
4023 \else | |
4024 #2 | |
4025 \fi | |
4026 \par | |
4027 }} | |
4028 | |
4029 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. | |
4030 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, | |
4031 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. | |
4032 \catcode`\@=11 | |
4033 | |
4034 \newbox\partialpage | |
4035 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize | |
4036 | |
4037 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns | |
4038 % Grab any single-column material above us. | |
4039 \output = {% | |
4040 % | |
4041 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a | |
4042 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output | |
4043 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is | |
4044 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In | |
4045 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal | |
4046 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this | |
4047 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. | |
4048 \ifvoid\partialpage \else | |
4049 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% | |
4050 \fi | |
4051 % | |
4052 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% | |
4053 % Unvbox the main output page. | |
4054 \unvbox\PAGE | |
4055 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip | |
4056 }% | |
4057 }% | |
4058 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage | |
4059 % | |
4060 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. | |
4061 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% | |
4062 % | |
4063 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this | |
4064 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 | |
4065 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple | |
4066 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the | |
4067 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. | |
4068 % | |
4069 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between | |
4070 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it | |
4071 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant | |
4072 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) | |
4073 % as it did when we hard-coded it. | |
4074 % | |
4075 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we | |
4076 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) | |
4077 % been clobbered. | |
4078 % | |
4079 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize | |
4080 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize | |
4081 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 | |
4082 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
4083 % | |
4084 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, | |
4085 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) | |
4086 \vsize = 2\vsize | |
4087 } | |
4088 | |
4089 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except | |
4090 % the last. | |
4091 % | |
4092 \def\doublecolumnout{% | |
4093 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth | |
4094 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal | |
4095 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the | |
4096 % previous page. | |
4097 \dimen@ = \vsize | |
4098 \divide\dimen@ by 2 | |
4099 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage | |
4100 % | |
4101 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. | |
4102 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ | |
4103 \onepageout\pagesofar | |
4104 \unvbox255 | |
4105 \penalty\outputpenalty | |
4106 } | |
4107 % | |
4108 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, | |
4109 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. | |
4110 \def\pagesofar{% | |
4111 \unvbox\partialpage | |
4112 % | |
4113 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
4114 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize | |
4115 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% | |
4116 } | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
4117 % |
37713 | 4118 % All done with double columns. |
4119 \def\enddoublecolumns{% | |
4120 \output = {% | |
4121 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the | |
4122 % current page, no automatic page break. | |
4123 \balancecolumns | |
4124 % | |
4125 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, | |
4126 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output | |
4127 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not | |
4128 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal | |
4129 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be | |
4130 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes | |
4131 % the output somewhat more palatable.) | |
4132 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% | |
4133 }% | |
4134 \eject | |
4135 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns | |
4136 % | |
4137 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted | |
4138 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column | |
4139 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the | |
4140 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). | |
4141 \pagegoal = \vsize | |
4142 } | |
4143 % | |
4144 % Called at the end of the double column material. | |
4145 \def\balancecolumns{% | |
4146 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. | |
4147 \dimen@ = \ht0 | |
4148 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip | |
4149 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip | |
4150 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to | |
4151 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% | |
4152 \splittopskip = \topskip | |
4153 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. | |
4154 {% | |
4155 \vbadness = 10000 | |
4156 \loop | |
4157 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 | |
4158 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ | |
4159 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ | |
4160 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt | |
4161 \repeat | |
4162 }% | |
4163 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% | |
4164 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% | |
4165 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% | |
4166 % | |
4167 \pagesofar | |
4168 } | |
4169 \catcode`\@ = \other | |
4170 | |
4171 | |
4172 \message{sectioning,} | |
4173 % Chapters, sections, etc. | |
4174 | |
69769 | 4175 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered |
4176 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf | |
4177 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter | |
4178 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 | |
4179 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) | |
4180 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 | |
37713 | 4181 \newcount\chapno |
4182 \newcount\secno \secno=0 | |
4183 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 | |
4184 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 | |
4185 | |
4186 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... | |
4187 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ | |
69769 | 4188 % |
37713 | 4189 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
69769 | 4190 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple |
4191 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual | |
37713 | 4192 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. |
69769 | 4193 % |
37713 | 4194 \def\appendixletter{% |
4195 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% | |
4196 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% | |
4197 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% | |
4198 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% | |
4199 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% | |
4200 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% | |
4201 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% | |
4202 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% | |
4203 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% | |
4204 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% | |
4205 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% | |
4206 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% | |
4207 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% | |
4208 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% | |
4209 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% | |
4210 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% | |
4211 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% | |
4212 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% | |
4213 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% | |
4214 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% | |
4215 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% | |
4216 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% | |
4217 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% | |
4218 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% | |
4219 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% | |
4220 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% | |
4221 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is | |
4222 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not | |
4223 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out | |
4224 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. | |
4225 \else\char\the\appendixno | |
4226 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
4227 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} | |
4228 | |
4229 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. | |
4230 % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. | |
69769 | 4231 % However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks. |
37713 | 4232 \def\thischapter{} |
4233 \def\thissection{} | |
4234 | |
4235 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level | |
69769 | 4236 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count |
37713 | 4237 |
4238 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. | |
4239 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} | |
4240 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name | |
4241 | |
4242 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. | |
4243 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} | |
4244 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name | |
4245 | |
69769 | 4246 % we only have subsub. |
4247 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 | |
4248 % | |
4249 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. | |
4250 % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: | |
4251 \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel | |
4252 % | |
4253 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: | |
4254 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. | |
4255 \def\chapheadtype{N} | |
4256 | |
4257 % Choose a heading macro | |
4258 % #1 is heading type | |
4259 % #2 is heading level | |
4260 % #3 is text for heading | |
4261 \def\genhead#1#2#3{% | |
4262 % Compute the abs. sec. level: | |
4263 \absseclevel=#2 | |
4264 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase | |
4265 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: | |
4266 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 | |
4267 \absseclevel = 0 | |
37713 | 4268 \else |
69769 | 4269 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 |
4270 \absseclevel = 3 | |
4271 \fi | |
37713 | 4272 \fi |
69769 | 4273 % The heading type: |
4274 \def\headtype{#1}% | |
4275 \if \headtype U% | |
4276 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel | |
4277 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel | |
4278 \fi | |
37713 | 4279 \else |
69769 | 4280 % Check for appendix sections: |
4281 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 | |
4282 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% | |
4283 \else | |
4284 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% | |
4285 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% | |
4286 \fi\fi | |
4287 \fi | |
4288 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: | |
4289 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel | |
4290 \def\headtype{U}% | |
4291 \else | |
4292 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 | |
4293 \fi | |
4294 \fi | |
4295 % Now print the heading: | |
4296 \if \headtype U% | |
4297 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4298 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% | |
4299 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% | |
4300 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4301 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4302 \fi | |
4303 \else | |
4304 \if \headtype A% | |
4305 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4306 \appendixzzz{#3}% | |
4307 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% | |
4308 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4309 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4310 \fi | |
4311 \else | |
4312 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4313 \chapterzzz{#3}% | |
4314 \or \seczzz{#3}% | |
4315 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4316 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4317 \fi | |
4318 \fi | |
37713 | 4319 \fi |
69769 | 4320 \suppressfirstparagraphindent |
4321 } | |
4322 | |
4323 % an interface: | |
4324 \def\numhead{\genhead N} | |
4325 \def\apphead{\genhead A} | |
4326 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} | |
4327 | |
4328 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset | |
4329 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. | |
4330 % | |
4331 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers | |
4332 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. | |
4333 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
4334 % | |
4335 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz | |
4336 \def\chapterzzz#1{% | |
4337 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such | |
4338 % as an @include file. | |
4339 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4340 \global\advance\chapno by 1 | |
4341 % | |
4342 % Used for \float. | |
4343 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% | |
4344 \resetallfloatnos | |
4345 % | |
4346 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% | |
4347 % | |
4348 % Write the actual heading. | |
4349 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% | |
4350 % | |
4351 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. | |
4352 \global\let\section = \numberedsec | |
4353 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
4354 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
4355 } | |
4356 | |
4357 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz | |
4358 \def\appendixzzz#1{% | |
4359 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4360 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 | |
4361 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% | |
4362 \resetallfloatnos | |
4363 % | |
4364 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% | |
4365 \message{\appendixnum}% | |
4366 % | |
4367 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% | |
4368 % | |
4369 \global\let\section = \appendixsec | |
4370 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec | |
4371 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec | |
4372 } | |
4373 | |
4374 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz | |
4375 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% | |
4376 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4377 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 | |
4378 % | |
4379 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. | |
4380 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
4381 \resetallfloatnos | |
4382 % | |
4383 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the | |
4384 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX | |
4385 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX | |
4386 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant | |
4387 % to be executed, not expanded). | |
4388 % | |
4389 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear | |
4390 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use | |
4391 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, | |
4392 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for | |
4393 % the toc entries.) | |
4394 \toks0 = {#1}% | |
4395 \message{(\the\toks0)}% | |
4396 % | |
4397 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% | |
4398 % | |
4399 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec | |
4400 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec | |
4401 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec | |
37713 | 4402 } |
4403 | |
4404 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. | |
69769 | 4405 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% |
4406 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break | |
4407 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. | |
4408 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 | |
4409 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters | |
4410 \unnmhead0{#1}% | |
4411 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
4412 } | |
37713 | 4413 |
4414 % @top is like @unnumbered. | |
69769 | 4415 \let\top\unnumbered |
37713 | 4416 |
4417 % Sections. | |
69769 | 4418 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
4419 \def\seczzz#1{% | |
4420 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4421 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% | |
4422 } | |
4423 | |
4424 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz | |
4425 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% | |
4426 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4427 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% | |
4428 } | |
4429 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection | |
4430 | |
4431 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz | |
4432 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% | |
4433 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4434 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% | |
37713 | 4435 } |
4436 | |
4437 % Subsections. | |
69769 | 4438 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
4439 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
4440 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4441 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
4442 } | |
4443 | |
4444 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz | |
4445 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% | |
4446 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4447 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% | |
4448 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
4449 } | |
4450 | |
4451 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz | |
4452 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
4453 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4454 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% | |
4455 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
37713 | 4456 } |
4457 | |
4458 % Subsubsections. | |
69769 | 4459 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
4460 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4461 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4462 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% | |
4463 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4464 } | |
4465 | |
4466 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz | |
4467 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4468 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4469 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% | |
4470 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4471 } | |
4472 | |
4473 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz | |
4474 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4475 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4476 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% | |
4477 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4478 } | |
37713 | 4479 |
4480 % These macros control what the section commands do, according | |
4481 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). | |
4482 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. | |
69769 | 4483 \let\section = \numberedsec |
4484 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
4485 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
37713 | 4486 |
4487 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading | |
4488 | |
4489 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: | |
4490 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit | |
4491 % overlong headings to fold. | |
4492 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a | |
4493 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. | |
4494 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and | |
4495 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. | |
4496 | |
4497 | |
69769 | 4498 \def\majorheading{% |
4499 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% | |
4500 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz | |
4501 } | |
4502 | |
4503 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} | |
4504 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% | |
4505 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4506 \parindent=0pt\raggedright | |
4507 \rm #1\hfill}}% | |
4508 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax | |
4509 \suppressfirstparagraphindent | |
4510 } | |
37713 | 4511 |
4512 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. | |
69769 | 4513 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
4514 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
4515 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
4516 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
4517 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
4518 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
37713 | 4519 |
4520 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only | |
4521 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), | |
4522 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. | |
4523 | |
4524 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) | |
4525 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} | |
4526 | |
4527 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it | |
4528 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) | |
4529 | |
4530 \newskip\chapheadingskip | |
4531 | |
4532 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} | |
4533 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
4534 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} | |
4535 | |
4536 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} | |
4537 | |
4538 \def\CHAPPAGoff{% | |
4539 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
4540 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak | |
4541 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} | |
4542 | |
4543 \def\CHAPPAGon{% | |
4544 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
4545 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager | |
4546 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager | |
4547 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} | |
4548 | |
69769 | 4549 \def\CHAPPAGodd{% |
37713 | 4550 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
4551 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage | |
4552 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage | |
4553 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} | |
4554 | |
4555 \CHAPPAGon | |
4556 | |
69769 | 4557 % Chapter opening. |
4558 % | |
4559 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, | |
4560 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. | |
4561 % | |
4562 % To test against our argument. | |
4563 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} | |
4564 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} | |
4565 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} | |
4566 % | |
4567 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% | |
37713 | 4568 \pchapsepmacro |
4569 {% | |
4570 \chapfonts \rm | |
69769 | 4571 % |
4572 % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the | |
4573 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called | |
4574 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. | |
4575 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4576 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% | |
4577 % | |
4578 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix | |
4579 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. | |
4580 \def\temptype{#2}% | |
4581 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | |
4582 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4583 \def\toctype{unnchap}% | |
71493 | 4584 \gdef\thischapternum{}% |
69769 | 4585 \gdef\thischapter{#1}% |
4586 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | |
4587 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry | |
4588 \def\toctype{omit}% | |
71493 | 4589 \gdef\thischapternum{}% |
69769 | 4590 \gdef\thischapter{}% |
4591 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | |
4592 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% | |
4593 \def\toctype{app}% | |
71493 | 4594 \xdef\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% |
69769 | 4595 % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter |
4596 % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't | |
4597 % use \thissection because that changes with each section. | |
4598 % | |
4599 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: | |
4600 \noexpand\thischaptername}% | |
4601 \else | |
4602 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% | |
4603 \def\toctype{numchap}% | |
71493 | 4604 \xdef\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% |
69769 | 4605 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: |
4606 \noexpand\thischaptername}% | |
4607 \fi\fi\fi | |
4608 % | |
4609 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the | |
4610 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc | |
4611 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. | |
4612 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% | |
4613 % | |
4614 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make | |
4615 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has | |
4616 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the | |
4617 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not | |
4618 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. | |
4619 \donoderef{#2}% | |
4620 % | |
4621 % Typeset the actual heading. | |
37713 | 4622 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
69769 | 4623 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe |
37713 | 4624 \unhbox0 #1\par}% |
4625 }% | |
4626 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title | |
4627 \nobreak | |
4628 } | |
4629 | |
4630 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. | |
4631 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
69769 | 4632 \def\centerparameters{% |
4633 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip | |
4634 \leftskip = \rightskip | |
4635 \parfillskip = 0pt | |
4636 } | |
4637 | |
4638 | |
4639 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not | |
4640 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. | |
4641 % | |
4642 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} | |
4643 % | |
37713 | 4644 \def\unnchfopen #1{% |
4645 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4646 \parindent=0pt\raggedright | |
4647 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | |
4648 } | |
4649 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts | |
4650 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% | |
4651 \par\penalty 5000 % | |
4652 } | |
4653 \def\centerchfopen #1{% | |
4654 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4655 \parindent=0pt | |
4656 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | |
4657 } | |
69769 | 4658 \def\CHAPFopen{% |
4659 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen | |
4660 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} | |
4661 | |
4662 | |
4663 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and | |
4664 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. | |
4665 % | |
37713 | 4666 \newskip\secheadingskip |
69769 | 4667 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} |
37713 | 4668 |
4669 % Subsection titles. | |
69769 | 4670 \newskip\subsecheadingskip |
4671 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} | |
37713 | 4672 |
4673 % Subsubsection titles. | |
69769 | 4674 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} |
4675 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} | |
4676 | |
4677 | |
4678 % Print any size, any type, section title. | |
4679 % | |
4680 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is | |
4681 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the | |
4682 % section number. | |
4683 % | |
4684 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% | |
37713 | 4685 {% |
4686 % Switch to the right set of fonts. | |
69769 | 4687 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm |
4688 % | |
4689 % Insert space above the heading. | |
4690 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname | |
4691 % | |
4692 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. | |
4693 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% | |
4694 \def\temptype{#3}% | |
37713 | 4695 % |
69769 | 4696 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
4697 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4698 \def\toctype{unn}% | |
4699 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4700 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | |
4701 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, | |
4702 % and don't redefine \thissection. | |
4703 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4704 \def\toctype{omit}% | |
4705 \let\sectionlevel=\empty | |
4706 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | |
4707 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
4708 \def\toctype{app}% | |
4709 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4710 \else | |
4711 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
4712 \def\toctype{num}% | |
4713 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4714 \fi\fi\fi | |
4715 % | |
4716 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. | |
4717 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% | |
37713 | 4718 % |
69769 | 4719 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). |
4720 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. | |
4721 \donoderef{#3}% | |
4722 % | |
4723 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. | |
4724 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be | |
4725 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the | |
4726 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that | |
4727 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the | |
4728 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. | |
4729 \nobreak | |
4730 % | |
4731 % Output the actual section heading. | |
37713 | 4732 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
69769 | 4733 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number |
4734 \unhbox0 #1}% | |
37713 | 4735 }% |
69769 | 4736 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. |
4737 % Don't allow stretch, though. | |
4738 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname | |
4739 % | |
4740 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it | |
4741 % was followed by glue. | |
4742 \nobreak | |
4743 % | |
4744 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that | |
4745 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a | |
4746 % discardable item.) | |
4747 \vskip-\parskip | |
4748 % | |
4749 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > | |
4750 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after | |
4751 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: | |
4752 % | |
4753 % @section sec-whatever | |
4754 % @deffn def-whatever | |
4755 \penalty 10001 | |
37713 | 4756 } |
4757 | |
4758 | |
4759 \message{toc,} | |
4760 % Table of contents. | |
4761 \newwrite\tocfile | |
4762 | |
4763 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. | |
69769 | 4764 % Called from @chapter, etc. |
4765 % | |
4766 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} | |
4767 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional | |
4768 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually | |
4769 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the | |
4770 % destination to jump to. | |
4771 % | |
4772 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or | |
4773 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. | |
4774 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the | |
4775 % table of contents chapter openings themselves. | |
37713 | 4776 % |
4777 \newif\iftocfileopened | |
69769 | 4778 \def\omitkeyword{omit}% |
4779 % | |
4780 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% | |
4781 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% | |
4782 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else | |
4783 \iftocfileopened\else | |
4784 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc | |
4785 \global\tocfileopenedtrue | |
4786 \fi | |
4787 % | |
4788 \iflinks | |
4789 {\atdummies | |
4790 \edef\temp{% | |
4791 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% | |
4792 \temp | |
4793 }% | |
4794 \fi | |
37713 | 4795 \fi |
69769 | 4796 % |
4797 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're | |
4798 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't | |
4799 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered | |
4800 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first | |
4801 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named | |
4802 % `1', and two named `2'. | |
4803 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi | |
4804 } | |
4805 | |
4806 | |
4807 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman | |
4808 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant | |
4809 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. | |
4810 % | |
4811 \def\activecatcodes{% | |
4812 \catcode`\"=\active | |
4813 \catcode`\$=\active | |
4814 \catcode`\<=\active | |
4815 \catcode`\>=\active | |
4816 \catcode`\\=\active | |
4817 \catcode`\^=\active | |
4818 \catcode`\_=\active | |
4819 \catcode`\|=\active | |
4820 \catcode`\~=\active | |
4821 } | |
4822 | |
4823 | |
4824 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. | |
4825 \def\readtocfile{% | |
4826 \setupdatafile | |
4827 \activecatcodes | |
4828 \input \jobname.toc | |
37713 | 4829 } |
4830 | |
4831 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in | |
4832 \newcount\savepageno | |
4833 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 | |
4834 | |
69769 | 4835 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. |
37713 | 4836 % |
4837 \def\startcontents#1{% | |
69769 | 4838 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should |
4839 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain | |
4840 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. | |
4841 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> | |
4842 \contentsalignmacro | |
4843 \immediate\closeout\tocfile | |
4844 % | |
4845 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. | |
4846 % It is abundantly clear what they are. | |
4847 \def\thischapter{}% | |
4848 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% | |
4849 % | |
4850 \savepageno = \pageno | |
4851 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. | |
4852 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. | |
4853 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. | |
4854 % | |
4855 % Roman numerals for page numbers. | |
4856 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi | |
37713 | 4857 } |
4858 | |
4859 | |
4860 % Normal (long) toc. | |
4861 \def\contents{% | |
69769 | 4862 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% |
4863 \openin 1 \jobname.toc | |
4864 \ifeof 1 \else | |
4865 \readtocfile | |
4866 \fi | |
4867 \vfill \eject | |
4868 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
4869 \ifeof 1 \else | |
4870 \pdfmakeoutlines | |
4871 \fi | |
4872 \closein 1 | |
4873 \endgroup | |
4874 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
4875 \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
37713 | 4876 } |
4877 | |
4878 % And just the chapters. | |
4879 \def\summarycontents{% | |
69769 | 4880 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% |
4881 % | |
4882 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry | |
4883 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry | |
4884 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry | |
4885 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. | |
4886 \secfonts | |
4887 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf | |
4888 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt | |
4889 \rm | |
4890 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 | |
4891 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. | |
4892 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} | |
4893 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4894 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4895 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4896 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4897 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4898 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4899 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4900 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4901 \openin 1 \jobname.toc | |
4902 \ifeof 1 \else | |
4903 \readtocfile | |
4904 \fi | |
4905 \closein 1 | |
4906 \vfill \eject | |
4907 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
4908 \endgroup | |
4909 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
4910 \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
37713 | 4911 } |
4912 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents | |
4913 | |
69769 | 4914 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. |
4915 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. | |
4916 % | |
4917 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% | |
4918 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the | |
4919 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. | |
4920 % But use \hss just in case. | |
4921 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after | |
4922 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) | |
4923 % | |
4924 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange | |
4925 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and | |
4926 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 | |
4927 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters | |
4928 % there are before deciding ... | |
4929 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% | |
4930 } | |
37713 | 4931 |
4932 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. | |
4933 % The first argument is the chapter or section name. | |
4934 % The last argument is the page number. | |
4935 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... | |
4936 | |
47284 | 4937 % Chapters, in the main contents. |
69769 | 4938 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
47284 | 4939 % |
4940 % Chapters, in the short toc. | |
4941 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. | |
69769 | 4942 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% |
4943 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% | |
37713 | 4944 } |
4945 | |
47284 | 4946 % Appendices, in the main contents. |
69769 | 4947 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. |
4948 % | |
4949 \def\appendixbox#1{% | |
4950 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. | |
4951 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% | |
4952 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} | |
4953 % | |
4954 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
47284 | 4955 |
4956 % Unnumbered chapters. | |
69769 | 4957 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} |
4958 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} | |
37713 | 4959 |
4960 % Sections. | |
69769 | 4961 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
4962 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry | |
4963 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
37713 | 4964 |
4965 % Subsections. | |
69769 | 4966 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
4967 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry | |
4968 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
37713 | 4969 |
4970 % And subsubsections. | |
69769 | 4971 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
4972 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry | |
4973 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
37713 | 4974 |
4975 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. | |
69769 | 4976 % Same as \defaultparindent. |
4977 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt | |
37713 | 4978 |
4979 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the | |
4980 % page number. | |
4981 % | |
4982 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters | |
4983 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. | |
4984 \def\dochapentry#1#2{% | |
4985 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip | |
4986 \begingroup | |
4987 \chapentryfonts | |
4988 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
4989 \endgroup | |
4990 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip | |
4991 } | |
4992 | |
4993 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
4994 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent | |
4995 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
4996 \endgroup} | |
4997 | |
4998 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
4999 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent | |
5000 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5001 \endgroup} | |
5002 | |
5003 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
5004 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent | |
5005 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5006 \endgroup} | |
5007 | |
69769 | 5008 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. |
5009 \let\tocentry = \entry | |
37713 | 5010 |
5011 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. | |
5012 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} | |
5013 | |
5014 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
5015 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
5016 | |
5017 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} | |
5018 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
69769 | 5019 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} |
5020 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
37713 | 5021 |
5022 | |
5023 \message{environments,} | |
5024 % @foo ... @end foo. | |
5025 | |
47284 | 5026 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5027 % |
37713 | 5028 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of |
5029 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. | |
47284 | 5030 % |
37713 | 5031 \def\point{$\star$} |
5032 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} | |
5033 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} | |
5034 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} | |
5035 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} | |
5036 | |
47284 | 5037 % The @error{} command. |
37713 | 5038 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5039 % |
47284 | 5040 \newbox\errorbox |
5041 % | |
37713 | 5042 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. |
5043 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules | |
5044 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) | |
5045 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} | |
47284 | 5046 % |
69769 | 5047 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil |
37713 | 5048 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. |
5049 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. | |
69769 | 5050 \vbox{% |
37713 | 5051 \hrule height\dimen2 |
5052 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. | |
5053 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. | |
5054 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. | |
5055 \hrule height\dimen2} | |
5056 \hfil} | |
47284 | 5057 % |
37713 | 5058 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} |
5059 | |
5060 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. | |
5061 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. | |
5062 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. | |
5063 | |
69769 | 5064 \envdef\tex{% |
37713 | 5065 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
5066 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 | |
69769 | 5067 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie |
37713 | 5068 \catcode `\%=14 |
69769 | 5069 \catcode `\+=\other |
5070 \catcode `\"=\other | |
5071 \catcode `\|=\other | |
5072 \catcode `\<=\other | |
5073 \catcode `\>=\other | |
37713 | 5074 \escapechar=`\\ |
5075 % | |
5076 \let\b=\ptexb | |
5077 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet | |
5078 \let\c=\ptexc | |
5079 \let\,=\ptexcomma | |
5080 \let\.=\ptexdot | |
5081 \let\dots=\ptexdots | |
5082 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv | |
5083 \let\!=\ptexexclam | |
5084 \let\i=\ptexi | |
69769 | 5085 \let\indent=\ptexindent |
5086 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
37713 | 5087 \let\{=\ptexlbrace |
5088 \let\+=\tabalign | |
5089 \let\}=\ptexrbrace | |
69769 | 5090 \let\/=\ptexslash |
37713 | 5091 \let\*=\ptexstar |
5092 \let\t=\ptext | |
69769 | 5093 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing |
37713 | 5094 % |
5095 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% | |
5096 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% | |
5097 \def\@{@}% | |
69769 | 5098 } |
5099 % There is no need to define \Etex. | |
37713 | 5100 |
47284 | 5101 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. |
69769 | 5102 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, |
47284 | 5103 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). |
37713 | 5104 |
5105 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. | |
5106 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in | |
5107 | |
5108 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other | |
5109 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't | |
5110 % have any width. | |
5111 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} | |
5112 | |
5113 % This space is always present above and below environments. | |
5114 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt | |
5115 | |
5116 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here | |
5117 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip | |
5118 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the | |
69769 | 5119 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. |
37713 | 5120 % |
47284 | 5121 \def\aboveenvbreak{{% |
69769 | 5122 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and |
5123 % \sectionheading, q.v. | |
5124 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else | |
47284 | 5125 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip |
5126 \endgraf | |
5127 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount | |
5128 \removelastskip | |
69769 | 5129 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak |
5130 % or better ... | |
5131 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi | |
47284 | 5132 \vskip\envskipamount |
5133 \fi | |
5134 \fi | |
5135 }} | |
37713 | 5136 |
5137 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak | |
5138 | |
69769 | 5139 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will |
5140 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. | |
37713 | 5141 \let\nonarrowing=\relax |
5142 | |
5143 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around | |
5144 % environment contents. | |
5145 \font\circle=lcircle10 | |
5146 \newdimen\circthick | |
5147 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner | |
5148 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip | |
5149 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle | |
5150 % | |
5151 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth | |
5152 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} | |
5153 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} | |
5154 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} | |
5155 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
5156 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr | |
5157 \hskip\rskip}} | |
5158 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
5159 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr | |
5160 \hskip\rskip}} | |
5161 % | |
5162 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip | |
5163 | |
69769 | 5164 \envdef\cartouche{% |
5165 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. | |
5166 \startsavinginserts | |
5167 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip | |
5168 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. | |
5169 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip | |
5170 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip | |
5171 \cartouter=\hsize | |
5172 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either | |
5173 % side, and for 6pt waste from | |
5174 % each corner char, and rule thickness | |
5175 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip | |
5176 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. | |
5177 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
5178 \vbox\bgroup | |
5179 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt | |
5180 \carttop | |
5181 \hbox\bgroup | |
5182 \hskip\lskip | |
5183 \vrule\kern3pt | |
5184 \vbox\bgroup | |
5185 \kern3pt | |
5186 \hsize=\cartinner | |
5187 \baselineskip=\normbskip | |
5188 \lineskip=\normlskip | |
5189 \parskip=\normpskip | |
5190 \vskip -\parskip | |
5191 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. | |
5192 } | |
37713 | 5193 \def\Ecartouche{% |
69769 | 5194 \ifhmode\par\fi |
5195 \kern3pt | |
5196 \egroup | |
5197 \kern3pt\vrule | |
5198 \hskip\rskip | |
5199 \egroup | |
5200 \cartbot | |
5201 \egroup | |
5202 \checkinserts | |
5203 } | |
37713 | 5204 |
5205 | |
5206 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, | |
5207 % inside a group. | |
5208 \def\nonfillstart{% | |
5209 \aboveenvbreak | |
5210 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy | |
5211 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. | |
5212 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines | |
5213 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output | |
5214 \parskip = 0pt | |
5215 \parindent = 0pt | |
5216 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes | |
5217 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
5218 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
5219 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing | |
69769 | 5220 \else |
5221 \let\nonarrowing = \relax | |
5222 \fi | |
5223 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent | |
5224 } | |
5225 | |
5226 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. | |
5227 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. | |
5228 % This affects the following displayed environments: | |
5229 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp | |
5230 % | |
5231 \def\smallword{small} | |
5232 \def\nosmallword{nosmall} | |
5233 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax | |
5234 \def\setnormaldispenv{% | |
5235 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword | |
5236 \smallexamplefonts \rm | |
5237 \fi | |
5238 } | |
5239 \def\setsmalldispenv{% | |
5240 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword | |
5241 \else | |
5242 \smallexamplefonts \rm | |
37713 | 5243 \fi |
5244 } | |
5245 | |
69769 | 5246 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. |
5247 % Let's do it by one command: | |
5248 \def\makedispenv #1#2{ | |
5249 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} | |
5250 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} | |
5251 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
5252 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
5253 } | |
5254 | |
5255 % Define two synonyms: | |
5256 \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ | |
5257 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} | |
5258 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} | |
5259 } | |
5260 | |
5261 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. | |
5262 % | |
5263 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. | |
5264 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. | |
5265 % | |
5266 \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% | |
37713 | 5267 \nonfillstart |
5268 \tt | |
5269 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. | |
5270 \gobble % eat return | |
5271 } | |
5272 | |
69769 | 5273 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. |
5274 % | |
5275 \makedispenv {display}{% | |
37713 | 5276 \nonfillstart |
5277 \gobble | |
5278 } | |
69769 | 5279 |
5280 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. | |
5281 % | |
5282 \makedispenv{format}{% | |
5283 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
37713 | 5284 \nonfillstart |
5285 \gobble | |
5286 } | |
69769 | 5287 |
5288 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. | |
5289 \envdef\flushleft{% | |
5290 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
5291 \nonfillstart | |
5292 \gobble | |
5293 } | |
5294 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak | |
37713 | 5295 |
5296 % @flushright. | |
5297 % | |
69769 | 5298 \envdef\flushright{% |
5299 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
37713 | 5300 \nonfillstart |
5301 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill | |
5302 \gobble | |
5303 } | |
69769 | 5304 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak |
37713 | 5305 |
5306 | |
5307 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) | |
69769 | 5308 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since |
5309 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and | |
5310 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. | |
5311 % | |
5312 \envdef\quotation{% | |
37713 | 5313 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip |
5314 \parindent=0pt | |
5315 % | |
5316 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. | |
5317 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
5318 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
5319 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing | |
5320 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing | |
69769 | 5321 \else |
37713 | 5322 \let\nonarrowing = \relax |
5323 \fi | |
69769 | 5324 \parsearg\quotationlabel |
5325 } | |
5326 | |
5327 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're | |
5328 % doing normal filling. | |
5329 % | |
5330 \def\Equotation{% | |
5331 \par | |
5332 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else | |
5333 % indent a bit. | |
5334 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% | |
5335 \fi | |
5336 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% | |
5337 } | |
5338 | |
5339 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. | |
5340 \def\quotationlabel#1{% | |
5341 \def\temp{#1}% | |
5342 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
5343 {\bf #1: }% | |
5344 \fi | |
37713 | 5345 } |
5346 | |
5347 | |
5348 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5349 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, |
37713 | 5350 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: |
5351 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org | |
5352 % | |
5353 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. | |
5354 % | |
69769 | 5355 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets |
5356 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a | |
5357 % verbatim line. | |
37713 | 5358 \def\dospecials{% |
69769 | 5359 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% |
5360 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% | |
5361 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% | |
5362 } | |
37713 | 5363 % |
5364 % [Knuth] p. 380 | |
5365 \def\uncatcodespecials{% | |
69769 | 5366 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} |
37713 | 5367 % |
5368 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 | |
5369 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font | |
5370 \begingroup | |
5371 \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} | |
5372 \endgroup | |
5373 % | |
5374 % Setup for the @verb command. | |
5375 % | |
5376 % Eight spaces for a tab | |
5377 \begingroup | |
5378 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5379 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} | |
5380 \endgroup | |
5381 % | |
5382 \def\setupverb{% | |
5383 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | |
5384 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% | |
5385 \catcode`\`=\active | |
5386 \tabeightspaces | |
5387 % Respect line breaks, | |
5388 % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
5389 % make each space count | |
5390 % must do in this order: | |
5391 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
5392 } | |
5393 | |
5394 % Setup for the @verbatim environment | |
5395 % | |
5396 % Real tab expansion | |
5397 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount | |
5398 % | |
5399 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} | |
5400 \begingroup | |
5401 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5402 \gdef\tabexpand{% | |
5403 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5404 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup | |
5405 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab | |
5406 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw | |
5407 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw | |
5408 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw | |
5409 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox | |
5410 }% | |
5411 } | |
5412 \endgroup | |
5413 \def\setupverbatim{% | |
69769 | 5414 \let\nonarrowing = t% |
5415 \nonfillstart | |
37713 | 5416 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim |
5417 \tt | |
5418 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% | |
5419 \catcode`\`=\active | |
5420 \tabexpand | |
5421 % Respect line breaks, | |
5422 % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
5423 % make each space count | |
5424 % must do in this order: | |
5425 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
5426 \everypar{\starttabbox}% | |
5427 } | |
5428 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5429 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique |
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5430 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a |
37713 | 5431 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: |
5432 % | |
5433 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} | |
5434 % | |
5435 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} | |
5436 \begingroup | |
69769 | 5437 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other |
37713 | 5438 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] |
5439 \endgroup | |
5440 % | |
5441 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} | |
5442 % | |
5443 % | |
5444 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that | |
5445 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: | |
5446 % | |
5447 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} | |
5448 % | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5449 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, |
37713 | 5450 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': |
69769 | 5451 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. |
37713 | 5452 % |
5453 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] | |
69769 | 5454 % |
37713 | 5455 \begingroup |
5456 \catcode`\ =\active | |
69769 | 5457 \obeylines % |
5458 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end | |
5459 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank | |
5460 % line in the output. | |
5461 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% | |
5462 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but | |
5463 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. | |
37713 | 5464 \endgroup |
5465 % | |
69769 | 5466 \envdef\verbatim{% |
5467 \setupverbatim\doverbatim | |
5468 } | |
5469 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak | |
5470 | |
37713 | 5471 |
5472 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. | |
5473 % | |
69769 | 5474 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} |
37713 | 5475 % |
5476 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% | |
69769 | 5477 {% |
5478 \makevalueexpandable | |
5479 \setupverbatim | |
5480 \input #1 | |
5481 \afterenvbreak | |
5482 }% | |
37713 | 5483 } |
5484 | |
47284 | 5485 % @copying ... @end copying. |
5486 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5487 % |
69769 | 5488 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. |
5489 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the | |
5490 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done | |
5491 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source | |
5492 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as | |
5493 % possible is very desirable. | |
5494 % | |
5495 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} | |
5496 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} | |
5497 % | |
5498 \def\insertcopying{% | |
5499 \begingroup | |
5500 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page | |
5501 \scanexp\copyingtext | |
5502 \endgroup | |
5503 } | |
37713 | 5504 |
5505 \message{defuns,} | |
5506 % @defun etc. | |
5507 | |
5508 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in | |
5509 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt | |
5510 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt | |
5511 | |
69769 | 5512 % Start the processing of @deffn: |
5513 \def\startdefun{% | |
5514 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 | |
5515 \medbreak | |
5516 \else | |
5517 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, | |
5518 % which is there to keep the function description together with its | |
5519 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a | |
5520 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted | |
5521 % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning | |
5522 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow | |
5523 % a break between a section heading and a defun. | |
5524 % | |
5525 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi | |
5526 % | |
5527 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. | |
5528 % But do insert the glue. | |
5529 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint | |
5530 \fi | |
47284 | 5531 % |
37713 | 5532 \parindent=0in |
5533 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | |
5534 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
47284 | 5535 } |
5536 | |
69769 | 5537 \def\dodefunx#1{% |
5538 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: | |
5539 \checkenv#1% | |
5540 % | |
5541 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. | |
5542 % It's not a great place, though. | |
5543 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi | |
5544 % | |
5545 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: | |
5546 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% | |
5547 } | |
5548 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} | |
5549 | |
5550 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} | |
5551 % | |
5552 \def\printdefunline#1#2{% | |
37713 | 5553 \begingroup |
69769 | 5554 % call \deffnheader: |
5555 #1#2 \endheader | |
5556 % common ending: | |
5557 \interlinepenalty = 10000 | |
5558 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil | |
5559 \endgraf | |
5560 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip | |
5561 \penalty 10002 % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx | |
5562 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, | |
5563 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. | |
5564 \checkparencounts | |
37713 | 5565 \endgroup |
5566 } | |
5567 | |
69769 | 5568 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} |
5569 | |
5570 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; | |
5571 % the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. | |
5572 % | |
5573 \def\makedefun#1{% | |
5574 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun | |
5575 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun | |
5576 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% | |
5577 \temp | |
5578 } | |
5579 | |
5580 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader | |
5581 % | |
5582 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. | |
5583 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. | |
5584 % | |
5585 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% | |
5586 \envdef#1{% | |
5587 \startdefun | |
5588 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% | |
5589 }% | |
5590 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% | |
5591 \def#3% | |
5592 } | |
5593 | |
5594 %%% Untyped functions: | |
5595 | |
5596 % @deffn category name args | |
5597 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} | |
5598 | |
5599 % @deffn category class name args | |
5600 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
5601 | |
5602 % \defopon {category on}class name args | |
5603 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
5604 | |
5605 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args | |
5606 % | |
5607 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% | |
5608 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. | |
5609 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% | |
5610 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% | |
5611 } | |
5612 | |
5613 %%% Typed functions: | |
5614 | |
5615 % @deftypefn category type name args | |
5616 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} | |
5617 | |
5618 % @deftypeop category class type name args | |
5619 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
5620 | |
5621 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args | |
5622 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
5623 | |
5624 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args | |
5625 % | |
5626 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
5627 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
5628 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
5629 } | |
5630 | |
5631 %%% Typed variables: | |
5632 | |
5633 % @deftypevr category type var args | |
5634 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} | |
5635 | |
5636 % @deftypecv category class type var args | |
5637 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
5638 | |
5639 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args | |
5640 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
5641 | |
5642 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args | |
5643 % | |
5644 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
5645 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
5646 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
5647 } | |
5648 | |
5649 %%% Untyped variables: | |
5650 | |
5651 % @defvr category var args | |
5652 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } | |
5653 | |
5654 % @defcv category class var args | |
5655 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
5656 | |
5657 % \defcvof {category of}class var args | |
5658 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } | |
5659 | |
5660 %%% Type: | |
5661 % @deftp category name args | |
5662 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% | |
5663 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% | |
5664 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% | |
5665 } | |
5666 | |
5667 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: | |
5668 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
5669 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } | |
5670 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } | |
5671 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
5672 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
5673 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } | |
5674 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
5675 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} | |
5676 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} | |
5677 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
5678 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
5679 | |
5680 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). | |
5681 % #1 is the category, such as "Function". | |
5682 % #2 is the return type, if any. | |
5683 % #3 is the function name. | |
5684 % | |
5685 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. | |
5686 % | |
5687 \def\defname#1#2#3{% | |
5688 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... | |
5689 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | |
5690 % | |
5691 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps | |
5692 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line | |
5693 % just below it. | |
5694 \def\temp{#1}% | |
5695 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} | |
5696 % | |
5697 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. | |
5698 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, | |
5699 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: | |
5700 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip | |
5701 % The continuations: | |
5702 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent | |
5703 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) | |
5704 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 | |
5705 % | |
5706 % Put the type name to the right margin. | |
5707 \noindent | |
5708 \hbox to 0pt{% | |
5709 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize | |
5710 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: | |
5711 \kern\leftskip | |
5712 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. | |
5713 }% | |
5714 % | |
5715 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: | |
5716 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 | |
5717 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
5718 {% | |
5719 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: | |
5720 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. | |
5721 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's | |
5722 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in | |
5723 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. | |
5724 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. | |
5725 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no | |
5726 % one has made identifiers using them :). | |
5727 \df \tt | |
5728 \def\temp{#2}% return value type | |
5729 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi | |
5730 #3% output function name | |
5731 }% | |
5732 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm | |
5733 % | |
5734 \boldbrax | |
5735 % arguments will be output next, if any. | |
5736 } | |
5737 | |
5738 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using | |
5739 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in | |
5740 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very | |
5741 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. | |
5742 % | |
5743 \def\defunargs#1{% | |
5744 % use sl by default (not ttsl), | |
5745 % tt for the names. | |
5746 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 | |
5747 % | |
5748 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we | |
5749 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. | |
5750 \let\var=\ttslanted | |
5751 #1% | |
5752 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 | |
5753 } | |
5754 | |
5755 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. | |
5756 % | |
5757 \def\activeparens{% | |
5758 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active | |
5759 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active | |
5760 \catcode`\&=\active | |
5761 } | |
5762 | |
5763 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. | |
5764 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) | |
5765 | |
5766 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, | |
5767 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, | |
5768 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. | |
5769 { | |
5770 \activeparens | |
5771 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen | |
5772 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack | |
5773 \global\let& = \& | |
5774 | |
5775 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} | |
5776 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} | |
5777 } | |
5778 | |
5779 \newcount\parencount | |
5780 | |
5781 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards | |
5782 \newif\ifampseen | |
5783 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} | |
5784 | |
5785 \def\parenfont{% | |
5786 \ifampseen | |
5787 % At the first level, print parens in roman, | |
5788 % otherwise use the default font. | |
5789 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi | |
5790 \else | |
5791 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than | |
5792 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . | |
5793 \sf | |
5794 \fi | |
5795 } | |
5796 \def\infirstlevel#1{% | |
5797 \ifampseen | |
5798 \ifnum\parencount=1 | |
5799 #1% | |
5800 \fi | |
5801 \fi | |
5802 } | |
5803 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} | |
5804 | |
5805 \def\opnr{% | |
5806 \global\advance\parencount by 1 | |
5807 {\parenfont(}% | |
5808 \infirstlevel \bfafterword | |
5809 } | |
5810 \def\clnr{% | |
5811 {\parenfont)}% | |
5812 \infirstlevel \sl | |
5813 \global\advance\parencount by -1 | |
5814 } | |
5815 | |
5816 \newcount\brackcount | |
5817 \def\lbrb{% | |
5818 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 | |
5819 {\bf[}% | |
5820 } | |
5821 \def\rbrb{% | |
5822 {\bf]}% | |
5823 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 | |
5824 } | |
5825 | |
5826 \def\checkparencounts{% | |
5827 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi | |
5828 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi | |
5829 } | |
5830 \def\badparencount{% | |
5831 \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}% | |
5832 \global\parencount=0 | |
5833 } | |
5834 \def\badbrackcount{% | |
5835 \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}% | |
5836 \global\brackcount=0 | |
5837 } | |
37713 | 5838 |
5839 | |
5840 \message{macros,} | |
5841 % @macro. | |
5842 | |
5843 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, | |
5844 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. | |
5845 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined | |
69769 | 5846 \newwrite\macscribble |
5847 \def\scantokens#1{% | |
5848 \toks0={#1}% | |
5849 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp | |
5850 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% | |
5851 \immediate\closeout\macscribble | |
5852 \input \jobname.tmp | |
5853 } | |
5854 \fi | |
5855 | |
37713 | 5856 \def\scanmacro#1{% |
69769 | 5857 \begingroup |
5858 \newlinechar`\^^M | |
5859 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces | |
5860 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex | |
5861 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active | |
5862 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had | |
5863 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears | |
5864 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 | |
5865 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ | |
5866 % ... and \example | |
5867 \spaceisspace | |
5868 % | |
5869 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. | |
5870 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX | |
5871 % --kasal, 29nov03 | |
5872 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% | |
5873 \endgroup | |
5874 } | |
5875 | |
5876 \def\scanexp#1{% | |
5877 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% | |
5878 \temp | |
5879 } | |
37713 | 5880 |
5881 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters | |
5882 \newtoks\macname % Macro name | |
5883 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? | |
69769 | 5884 |
5885 % List of all defined macros in the form | |
5886 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... | |
5887 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split | |
5888 % if there is a need. | |
5889 \def\macrolist{} | |
5890 | |
5891 % Add the macro to \macrolist | |
5892 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} | |
5893 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% | |
5894 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% | |
5895 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% | |
5896 } | |
37713 | 5897 |
5898 % Utility routines. | |
69769 | 5899 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, |
5900 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname | |
5901 % (except of course we have to play expansion games). | |
5902 % | |
37713 | 5903 \def\cslet#1#2{% |
69769 | 5904 \expandafter\let |
5905 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname | |
5906 \csname#2\endcsname | |
5907 } | |
37713 | 5908 |
5909 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. | |
5910 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). | |
5911 {\catcode`\@=11 | |
5912 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} | |
5913 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} | |
5914 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} | |
5915 \def\unbrace#1{#1} | |
5916 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} | |
5917 } | |
5918 | |
5919 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. | |
69769 | 5920 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% |
37713 | 5921 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% |
5922 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% | |
5923 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% | |
5924 } | |
5925 | |
5926 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where | |
5927 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active | |
5928 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. | |
5929 | |
5930 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is | |
5931 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro | |
5932 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. | |
5933 | |
69769 | 5934 \def\scanctxt{% |
5935 \catcode`\"=\other | |
5936 \catcode`\+=\other | |
5937 \catcode`\<=\other | |
5938 \catcode`\>=\other | |
5939 \catcode`\@=\other | |
5940 \catcode`\^=\other | |
5941 \catcode`\_=\other | |
5942 \catcode`\|=\other | |
5943 \catcode`\~=\other | |
5944 } | |
5945 | |
5946 \def\scanargctxt{% | |
5947 \scanctxt | |
5948 \catcode`\\=\other | |
5949 \catcode`\^^M=\other | |
5950 } | |
5951 | |
37713 | 5952 \def\macrobodyctxt{% |
69769 | 5953 \scanctxt |
5954 \catcode`\{=\other | |
5955 \catcode`\}=\other | |
5956 \catcode`\^^M=\other | |
5957 \usembodybackslash | |
5958 } | |
37713 | 5959 |
5960 \def\macroargctxt{% | |
69769 | 5961 \scanctxt |
5962 \catcode`\\=\other | |
5963 } | |
37713 | 5964 |
5965 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. | |
5966 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N | |
5967 % where N is the macro parameter number. | |
5968 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so | |
5969 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. | |
5970 | |
5971 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active | |
5972 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} | |
5973 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} | |
5974 } | |
5975 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} | |
5976 | |
5977 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
5978 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
5979 | |
5980 \def\macroxxx#1{% | |
5981 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist | |
5982 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments | |
5983 \paramno=0% | |
5984 \else | |
5985 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% | |
5986 \fi | |
5987 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname | |
5988 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% | |
5989 \else | |
5990 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax | |
47284 | 5991 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi |
37713 | 5992 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% |
5993 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% | |
69769 | 5994 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% |
37713 | 5995 \fi |
5996 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt | |
5997 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody | |
5998 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody | |
5999 \fi} | |
6000 | |
69769 | 6001 \parseargdef\unmacro{% |
37713 | 6002 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname |
6003 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% | |
6004 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% | |
69769 | 6005 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: |
37713 | 6006 \begingroup |
69769 | 6007 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax |
6008 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo | |
6009 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% | |
37713 | 6010 \endgroup |
6011 \else | |
6012 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% | |
6013 \fi | |
6014 } | |
6015 | |
69769 | 6016 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any |
6017 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. | |
6018 % | |
6019 \def\unmacrodo#1{% | |
6020 \ifx #1\relax | |
6021 % remove this | |
6022 \else | |
6023 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% | |
6024 \fi | |
6025 } | |
6026 | |
37713 | 6027 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a |
6028 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by | |
6029 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. | |
6030 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} | |
6031 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} | |
6032 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} | |
6033 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} | |
6034 | |
6035 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist | |
6036 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah | |
6037 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. | |
6038 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). | |
6039 | |
6040 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. | |
6041 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something | |
6042 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine | |
6043 % it to # just before using the token list produced. | |
6044 % | |
6045 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before | |
6046 % the macro is used. | |
6047 | |
6048 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% | |
6049 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} | |
6050 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% | |
6051 \if#1;\let\next=\relax | |
6052 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx | |
6053 \advance\paramno by 1% | |
6054 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname | |
6055 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% | |
6056 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% | |
6057 \fi\next} | |
6058 | |
6059 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. | |
6060 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) | |
6061 | |
6062 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% | |
6063 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
6064 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% | |
6065 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
6066 | |
6067 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and | |
6068 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. | |
6069 % Much magic with \expandafter here. | |
6070 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file | |
6071 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. | |
6072 \def\defmacro{% | |
6073 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars | |
6074 \ifrecursive | |
6075 \ifcase\paramno | |
6076 % 0 | |
6077 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6078 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
6079 \or % 1 | |
6080 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6081 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6082 \noexpand\braceorline | |
6083 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
6084 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
6085 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
6086 \else % many | |
6087 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6088 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6089 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
6090 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
6091 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
6092 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6093 \expandafter\xdef | |
6094 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6095 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
6096 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
6097 \fi | |
6098 \else | |
6099 \ifcase\paramno | |
6100 % 0 | |
6101 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6102 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
6103 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
6104 \or % 1 | |
6105 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6106 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6107 \noexpand\braceorline | |
6108 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
6109 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
6110 \egroup | |
6111 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
6112 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
6113 \else % many | |
6114 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6115 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6116 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
6117 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
6118 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
6119 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6120 \expandafter\xdef | |
6121 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6122 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
6123 \paramlist{% | |
6124 \egroup | |
6125 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
6126 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
6127 \fi | |
6128 \fi} | |
6129 | |
6130 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} | |
6131 | |
6132 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a | |
6133 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole | |
6134 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence | |
6135 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) | |
69769 | 6136 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} |
37713 | 6137 \def\braceorlinexxx{% |
6138 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else | |
6139 \expandafter\parsearg | |
69769 | 6140 \fi \macnamexxx} |
37713 | 6141 |
6142 | |
6143 % @alias. | |
6144 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal | |
6145 % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. | |
69769 | 6146 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} |
37713 | 6147 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} |
69769 | 6148 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% |
6149 {% | |
6150 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty | |
6151 \addtomacrolist{#1}% | |
6152 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% | |
6153 }% | |
6154 \next | |
6155 } | |
37713 | 6156 |
6157 | |
6158 \message{cross references,} | |
6159 | |
6160 \newwrite\auxfile | |
6161 | |
6162 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. | |
6163 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. | |
6164 | |
6165 % @inforef is relatively simple. | |
6166 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} | |
6167 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, | |
6168 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} | |
6169 | |
69769 | 6170 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in |
6171 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and | |
6172 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: | |
6173 % @node foo , bar , ... | |
6174 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. | |
6175 % | |
6176 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} | |
6177 % | |
6178 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: | |
6179 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs | |
6180 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} | |
6181 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} | |
6182 | |
37713 | 6183 \let\nwnode=\node |
69769 | 6184 \let\lastnode=\empty |
6185 | |
6186 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the | |
6187 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). | |
6188 % | |
6189 \def\donoderef#1{% | |
6190 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else | |
6191 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% | |
6192 \global\let\lastnode=\empty | |
37713 | 6193 \fi |
6194 } | |
6195 | |
6196 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. | |
6197 % | |
6198 \newcount\savesfregister | |
69769 | 6199 % |
6200 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} | |
6201 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} | |
6202 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} | |
6203 | |
6204 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an | |
6205 % anchor), which consists of three parts: | |
6206 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection, | |
6207 % or the anchor name. | |
6208 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or | |
6209 % empty for anchors. | |
6210 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. | |
6211 % | |
6212 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of | |
6213 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: | |
6214 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. | |
6215 % | |
6216 \def\setref#1#2{% | |
37713 | 6217 \pdfmkdest{#1}% |
69769 | 6218 \iflinks |
6219 {% | |
6220 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them | |
6221 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% | |
6222 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef | |
6223 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef | |
6224 }% | |
6225 \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}% | |
6226 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% | |
6227 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. | |
6228 \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout | |
6229 }% | |
6230 \fi | |
6231 } | |
37713 | 6232 |
6233 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is | |
6234 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed | |
6235 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed | |
6236 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. | |
6237 % | |
6238 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
6239 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
6240 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
6241 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup | |
6242 \unsepspaces | |
6243 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% | |
69769 | 6244 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% |
6245 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% | |
6246 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% | |
37713 | 6247 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt |
6248 % No printed node name was explicitly given. | |
6249 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax | |
6250 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. | |
69769 | 6251 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
37713 | 6252 \else |
6253 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside | |
6254 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. | |
6255 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6256 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. | |
69769 | 6257 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
37713 | 6258 \else |
6259 \ifhavexrefs | |
6260 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. | |
69769 | 6261 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% |
37713 | 6262 \else |
6263 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. | |
69769 | 6264 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
37713 | 6265 \fi% |
6266 \fi | |
6267 \fi | |
6268 \fi | |
6269 % | |
69769 | 6270 % Make link in pdf output. |
37713 | 6271 \ifpdf |
6272 \leavevmode | |
6273 \getfilename{#4}% | |
69769 | 6274 {\turnoffactive |
6275 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. | |
6276 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% | |
6277 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% | |
6278 % | |
47284 | 6279 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 |
6280 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
69769 | 6281 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% |
47284 | 6282 \else |
6283 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
69769 | 6284 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% |
47284 | 6285 \fi |
6286 }% | |
37713 | 6287 \linkcolor |
6288 \fi | |
6289 % | |
69769 | 6290 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" |
6291 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the | |
6292 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. | |
6293 {% | |
6294 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to | |
6295 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. | |
6296 \indexnofonts | |
6297 \turnoffactive | |
6298 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle | |
6299 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname | |
6300 }% | |
6301 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle | |
6302 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, | |
6303 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". | |
6304 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt | |
6305 \refx{#1-snt}{}% | |
6306 \else | |
6307 \printedrefname | |
6308 \fi | |
6309 % | |
6310 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append | |
6311 % "in MANUALNAME". | |
6312 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6313 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | |
6314 \fi | |
37713 | 6315 \else |
69769 | 6316 % node/anchor (non-float) references. |
6317 % | |
6318 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not | |
6319 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will | |
6320 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals | |
6321 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this | |
6322 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it | |
6323 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. | |
6324 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6325 \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | |
6326 \else | |
6327 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the | |
6328 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand | |
6329 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of | |
6330 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the | |
6331 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. | |
6332 {\turnoffactive | |
6333 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for | |
6334 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. | |
6335 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% | |
6336 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi | |
6337 }% | |
6338 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. | |
6339 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname | |
6340 % | |
6341 % But we always want a comma and a space: | |
6342 ,\space | |
6343 % | |
6344 % output the `page 3'. | |
6345 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% | |
6346 \fi | |
37713 | 6347 \fi |
6348 \endlink | |
6349 \endgroup} | |
6350 | |
69769 | 6351 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref |
6352 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, | |
6353 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly | |
6354 % one that Bob is working on :). | |
6355 % | |
6356 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} | |
6357 | |
6358 % Things referred to by \setref. | |
6359 % | |
37713 | 6360 \def\Ynothing{} |
69769 | 6361 \def\Yomitfromtoc{} |
6362 \def\Ynumbered{% | |
6363 \ifnum\secno=0 | |
6364 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno | |
6365 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
6366 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno | |
6367 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
6368 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
6369 \else | |
6370 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
6371 \fi\fi\fi | |
6372 } | |
6373 \def\Yappendix{% | |
6374 \ifnum\secno=0 | |
6375 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% | |
6376 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
6377 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno | |
6378 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
6379 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
6380 \else | |
6381 \putwordSection@tie | |
6382 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
6383 \fi\fi\fi | |
6384 } | |
37713 | 6385 |
6386 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. | |
6387 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. | |
69769 | 6388 % |
37713 | 6389 \def\refx#1#2{% |
69769 | 6390 {% |
6391 \indexnofonts | |
6392 \otherbackslash | |
6393 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX | |
6394 \csname XR#1\endcsname | |
6395 }% | |
6396 \ifx\thisrefX\relax | |
37713 | 6397 % If not defined, say something at least. |
6398 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright | |
6399 \iflinks | |
6400 \ifhavexrefs | |
6401 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% | |
6402 \else | |
6403 \ifwarnedxrefs\else | |
6404 \global\warnedxrefstrue | |
6405 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% | |
6406 \fi | |
6407 \fi | |
6408 \fi | |
6409 \else | |
6410 % It's defined, so just use it. | |
69769 | 6411 \thisrefX |
37713 | 6412 \fi |
6413 #2% Output the suffix in any case. | |
6414 } | |
6415 | |
69769 | 6416 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's |
6417 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid | |
6418 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. | |
6419 % | |
6420 \def\xrdef#1#2{% | |
6421 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value. | |
6422 % | |
6423 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? | |
6424 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname | |
6425 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. | |
6426 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist | |
6427 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname | |
6428 % | |
6429 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? | |
6430 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax | |
6431 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do | |
6432 \else | |
6433 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. | |
6434 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% | |
6435 \fi | |
6436 % | |
6437 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, | |
6438 % for later use in \listoffloats. | |
6439 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}% | |
6440 \fi | |
37713 | 6441 } |
6442 | |
6443 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. | |
69769 | 6444 % |
6445 \def\tryauxfile{% | |
6446 \openin 1 \jobname.aux | |
6447 \ifeof 1 \else | |
6448 \readdatafile{aux}% | |
6449 \global\havexrefstrue | |
6450 \fi | |
6451 \closein 1 | |
6452 } | |
6453 | |
6454 \def\setupdatafile{% | |
37713 | 6455 \catcode`\^^@=\other |
6456 \catcode`\^^A=\other | |
6457 \catcode`\^^B=\other | |
6458 \catcode`\^^C=\other | |
6459 \catcode`\^^D=\other | |
6460 \catcode`\^^E=\other | |
6461 \catcode`\^^F=\other | |
6462 \catcode`\^^G=\other | |
6463 \catcode`\^^H=\other | |
6464 \catcode`\^^K=\other | |
6465 \catcode`\^^L=\other | |
6466 \catcode`\^^N=\other | |
6467 \catcode`\^^P=\other | |
6468 \catcode`\^^Q=\other | |
6469 \catcode`\^^R=\other | |
6470 \catcode`\^^S=\other | |
6471 \catcode`\^^T=\other | |
6472 \catcode`\^^U=\other | |
6473 \catcode`\^^V=\other | |
6474 \catcode`\^^W=\other | |
6475 \catcode`\^^X=\other | |
6476 \catcode`\^^Z=\other | |
6477 \catcode`\^^[=\other | |
6478 \catcode`\^^\=\other | |
6479 \catcode`\^^]=\other | |
6480 \catcode`\^^^=\other | |
6481 \catcode`\^^_=\other | |
69769 | 6482 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. |
37713 | 6483 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't |
6484 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, | |
6485 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ | |
6486 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat | |
6487 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first | |
6488 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could | |
6489 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. | |
6490 % | |
6491 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: | |
6492 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter | |
6493 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. | |
6494 % | |
69769 | 6495 \catcode`\^=\other |
6496 % | |
6497 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... | |
37713 | 6498 \catcode`\~=\other |
6499 \catcode`\[=\other | |
6500 \catcode`\]=\other | |
6501 \catcode`\"=\other | |
6502 \catcode`\_=\other | |
6503 \catcode`\|=\other | |
6504 \catcode`\<=\other | |
6505 \catcode`\>=\other | |
6506 \catcode`\$=\other | |
6507 \catcode`\#=\other | |
6508 \catcode`\&=\other | |
69769 | 6509 \catcode`\%=\other |
37713 | 6510 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off |
69769 | 6511 % |
6512 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ | |
6513 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than | |
6514 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ | |
6515 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* | |
6516 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that | |
6517 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for | |
6518 % now. --karl, 15jan04. | |
6519 \catcode`\\=\other | |
6520 % | |
6521 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. | |
37713 | 6522 {% |
69769 | 6523 \count1=128 |
37713 | 6524 \def\loop{% |
69769 | 6525 \catcode\count1=\other |
6526 \advance\count1 by 1 | |
6527 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi | |
37713 | 6528 }% |
6529 }% | |
69769 | 6530 % |
6531 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. | |
37713 | 6532 \catcode`\{=1 |
6533 \catcode`\}=2 | |
69769 | 6534 \catcode`\@=0 |
6535 } | |
6536 | |
6537 \def\readdatafile#1{% | |
6538 \begingroup | |
6539 \setupdatafile | |
6540 \input\jobname.#1 | |
37713 | 6541 \endgroup} |
6542 | |
69769 | 6543 \message{insertions,} |
6544 % including footnotes. | |
37713 | 6545 |
6546 \newcount \footnoteno | |
6547 | |
6548 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is | |
6549 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a | |
6550 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is | |
6551 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a | |
6552 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) | |
6553 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } | |
6554 | |
6555 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. | |
6556 \let\footnotestyle=\comment | |
6557 | |
6558 {\catcode `\@=11 | |
6559 % | |
6560 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. | |
6561 \gdef\footnote{% | |
69769 | 6562 \let\indent=\ptexindent |
6563 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
37713 | 6564 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne |
6565 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% | |
6566 % | |
6567 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the | |
6568 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. | |
6569 \let\@sf\empty | |
69769 | 6570 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi |
37713 | 6571 % |
6572 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. | |
6573 \unskip | |
6574 \thisfootno\@sf | |
69769 | 6575 \dofootnote |
37713 | 6576 }% |
6577 | |
6578 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the | |
6579 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. | |
6580 % | |
69769 | 6581 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses |
6582 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when | |
37713 | 6583 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. |
6584 % | |
69769 | 6585 \gdef\dofootnote{% |
6586 \insert\footins\bgroup | |
37713 | 6587 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
6588 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. | |
6589 % So reset some parameters. | |
69769 | 6590 \hsize=\pagewidth |
37713 | 6591 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty |
6592 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes | |
6593 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox | |
6594 \floatingpenalty\@MM | |
6595 \leftskip\z@skip | |
6596 \rightskip\z@skip | |
6597 \spaceskip\z@skip | |
6598 \xspaceskip\z@skip | |
6599 \parindent\defaultparindent | |
6600 % | |
6601 \smallfonts \rm | |
6602 % | |
47284 | 6603 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears |
6604 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use | |
6605 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote | |
6606 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). | |
6607 \let\noindent = \relax | |
6608 % | |
6609 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the | |
6610 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. | |
6611 \everypar = {\hang}% | |
37713 | 6612 \textindent{\thisfootno}% |
6613 % | |
6614 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this | |
6615 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it | |
6616 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. | |
6617 \footstrut | |
6618 \futurelet\next\fo@t | |
6619 } | |
6620 }%end \catcode `\@=11 | |
6621 | |
69769 | 6622 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create |
6623 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion | |
6624 % would be lost. | |
6625 % Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote | |
6626 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. | |
6627 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. | |
6628 | |
6629 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. | |
6630 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled | |
6631 % out prematurely. | |
6632 % | |
6633 \def\startsavinginserts{% | |
6634 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert | |
6635 \let\insert\saveinsert | |
6636 \else | |
6637 \let\checkinserts\relax | |
6638 \fi | |
6639 } | |
6640 | |
6641 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and | |
6642 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. | |
6643 % | |
6644 \def\saveinsert#1{% | |
6645 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
6646 \afterassignment\next | |
6647 % swallow the left brace | |
6648 \let\temp = | |
6649 } | |
6650 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} | |
6651 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} | |
6652 | |
6653 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} | |
6654 | |
6655 \def\placesaveins#1{% | |
6656 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname | |
6657 {\box#1}% | |
6658 } | |
6659 | |
6660 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: | |
6661 { | |
6662 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) | |
6663 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} | |
6664 } | |
6665 | |
6666 % initialization: | |
6667 \def\newsaveins #1{% | |
6668 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
6669 \next | |
6670 } | |
6671 \def\newsaveinsX #1{% | |
6672 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% | |
6673 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts | |
6674 \checksaveins #1}% | |
6675 } | |
6676 | |
6677 % initialize: | |
6678 \let\checkinserts\empty | |
6679 \newsaveins\footins | |
6680 \newsaveins\margin | |
6681 | |
37713 | 6682 |
6683 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. | |
6684 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. | |
6685 % | |
6686 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image | |
6687 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get | |
6688 % undone and the next image would fail. | |
6689 \openin 1 = epsf.tex | |
6690 \ifeof 1 \else | |
69769 | 6691 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in |
6692 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). | |
37713 | 6693 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% |
6694 \input epsf.tex | |
6695 \fi | |
69769 | 6696 \closein 1 |
37713 | 6697 % |
6698 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. | |
6699 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf | |
6700 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to | |
6701 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get | |
6702 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} | |
6703 % | |
6704 \def\image#1{% | |
6705 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined | |
6706 \ifwarnednoepsf \else | |
6707 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp | |
6708 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% | |
6709 \global\warnednoepsftrue | |
6710 \fi | |
6711 \else | |
47284 | 6712 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish |
37713 | 6713 \fi |
6714 } | |
6715 % | |
6716 % Arguments to @image: | |
6717 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. | |
6718 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. | |
47284 | 6719 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. |
6720 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. | |
6721 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. | |
6722 \newif\ifimagevmode | |
6723 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup | |
6724 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example | |
6725 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names | |
6726 % If the image is by itself, center it. | |
6727 \ifvmode | |
6728 \imagevmodetrue | |
6729 \nobreak\bigskip | |
6730 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert | |
6731 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
6732 % above and below. |
47284 | 6733 \nobreak\vskip\parskip |
6734 \nobreak | |
69769 | 6735 \line\bgroup |
47284 | 6736 \fi |
6737 % | |
6738 % Output the image. | |
37713 | 6739 \ifpdf |
47284 | 6740 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% |
37713 | 6741 \else |
6742 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. | |
6743 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi | |
6744 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi | |
47284 | 6745 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% |
37713 | 6746 \fi |
47284 | 6747 % |
69769 | 6748 \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image |
47284 | 6749 \endgroup} |
37713 | 6750 |
6751 | |
69769 | 6752 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, |
6753 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the | |
6754 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. | |
6755 % | |
6756 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} | |
6757 | |
6758 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. | |
6759 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} | |
6760 | |
6761 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically | |
6762 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, | |
6763 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. | |
6764 % | |
6765 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to | |
6766 % be referable. | |
6767 % | |
6768 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It | |
6769 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). | |
6770 % | |
6771 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each | |
6772 % chapter-level command. | |
6773 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty | |
6774 % | |
6775 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% | |
6776 \let\thiscaption=\empty | |
6777 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty | |
6778 % | |
6779 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. | |
6780 % | |
6781 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an | |
6782 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
6783 % | |
6784 \startsavinginserts | |
6785 % | |
6786 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. | |
6787 \par | |
6788 % | |
6789 \vtop\bgroup | |
6790 \def\floattype{#1}% | |
6791 \def\floatlabel{#2}% | |
6792 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. | |
6793 % | |
6794 \ifx\floattype\empty | |
6795 \let\safefloattype=\empty | |
6796 \else | |
6797 {% | |
6798 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
6799 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
6800 \indexnofonts | |
6801 \turnoffactive | |
6802 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
6803 }% | |
6804 \fi | |
6805 % | |
6806 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. | |
6807 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
6808 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, | |
6809 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) | |
6810 % | |
6811 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname | |
6812 \global\advance\floatno by 1 | |
6813 % | |
6814 {% | |
6815 % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the | |
6816 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float | |
6817 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from | |
6818 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the | |
6819 % lists of floats. | |
6820 % | |
6821 \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% | |
6822 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% | |
6823 }% | |
6824 \fi | |
6825 % | |
6826 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. | |
6827 \vskip\parskip | |
6828 % | |
6829 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. | |
6830 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
6831 } | |
6832 | |
6833 % we have these possibilities: | |
6834 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap | |
6835 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 | |
6836 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap | |
6837 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo | |
6838 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap | |
6839 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 | |
6840 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap | |
6841 % @float & no caption: | |
6842 % | |
6843 \def\Efloat{% | |
6844 \let\floatident = \empty | |
6845 % | |
6846 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. | |
6847 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi | |
6848 % | |
6849 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. | |
6850 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
6851 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. | |
6852 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% | |
6853 \fi | |
6854 % the number. | |
6855 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | |
6856 \fi | |
6857 % | |
6858 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in | |
6859 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. | |
6860 \let\captionline = \floatident | |
6861 % | |
6862 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else | |
6863 \ifx\floatident\empty \else | |
6864 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between | |
6865 \fi | |
6866 % | |
6867 % caption text. | |
6868 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% | |
6869 \fi | |
6870 % | |
6871 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. | |
6872 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. | |
6873 \ifx\captionline\empty \else | |
6874 \vskip.5\parskip | |
6875 \captionline | |
6876 % | |
6877 % Space below caption. | |
6878 \vskip\parskip | |
6879 \fi | |
6880 % | |
6881 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this | |
6882 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. | |
6883 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
6884 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as | |
6885 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short | |
6886 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. | |
6887 {% | |
6888 \atdummies | |
6889 % | |
6890 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M | |
6891 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so | |
6892 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. | |
6893 \scanexp{% | |
6894 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% | |
6895 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty | |
6896 \thiscaption | |
6897 \else | |
6898 \thisshortcaption | |
6899 \fi | |
6900 }% | |
6901 }% | |
6902 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident | |
6903 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% | |
6904 }% | |
6905 \fi | |
6906 \egroup % end of \vtop | |
6907 % | |
6908 % place the captured inserts | |
6909 % | |
6910 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning | |
6911 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly | |
6912 % float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
6913 % | |
6914 \checkinserts | |
6915 } | |
6916 | |
6917 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. | |
6918 % | |
6919 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% | |
6920 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% | |
6921 } | |
6922 | |
6923 % @caption, @shortcaption | |
6924 % | |
6925 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} | |
6926 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} | |
6927 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} | |
6928 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} | |
6929 | |
6930 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are | |
6931 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. | |
6932 \def\getfloatno#1{% | |
6933 \ifx#1\relax | |
6934 % Haven't seen this figure type before. | |
6935 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% | |
6936 % | |
6937 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. | |
6938 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos | |
6939 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% | |
6940 \fi | |
6941 \let\floatno#1% | |
6942 } | |
6943 | |
6944 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref | |
6945 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we | |
6946 % first read the @float command. | |
6947 % | |
6948 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | |
6949 | |
6950 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can | |
6951 % distinguish floats from other xref types. | |
6952 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} | |
6953 | |
6954 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional | |
6955 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic | |
6956 % \thissection value which we \setref above. | |
6957 % | |
6958 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} | |
6959 % | |
6960 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the | |
6961 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. | |
6962 % | |
6963 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% | |
6964 \def\temp{#1}% | |
6965 \def\iffloattype{#2}% | |
6966 \ifx\temp\floatmagic | |
6967 } | |
6968 | |
6969 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. | |
6970 % | |
6971 \parseargdef\listoffloats{% | |
6972 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype | |
6973 {% | |
6974 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
6975 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
6976 \indexnofonts | |
6977 \turnoffactive | |
6978 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
6979 }% | |
6980 % | |
6981 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. | |
6982 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax | |
6983 \ifhavexrefs | |
6984 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. | |
6985 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% | |
6986 \fi | |
6987 \else | |
6988 \begingroup | |
6989 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc | |
6990 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo | |
6991 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname | |
6992 \endgroup | |
6993 \fi | |
6994 } | |
6995 | |
6996 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the | |
6997 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the | |
6998 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which | |
6999 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. | |
7000 % | |
7001 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since | |
7002 % they won't appear in the aux file). | |
7003 % | |
7004 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} | |
7005 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% | |
7006 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just | |
7007 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the | |
7008 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link | |
7009 % in pdf output. | |
7010 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% | |
7011 % | |
7012 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. | |
7013 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% | |
7014 \writeentry | |
7015 }} | |
7016 | |
37713 | 7017 \message{localization,} |
7018 % and i18n. | |
7019 | |
7020 % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after | |
7021 % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything | |
7022 % properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation. | |
7023 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. | |
7024 % | |
69769 | 7025 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{% |
37713 | 7026 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. |
69769 | 7027 % Read the file if it exists. |
7028 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex | |
7029 \ifeof 1 | |
7030 \errhelp = \nolanghelp | |
7031 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% | |
7032 \else | |
7033 \input txi-#1.tex | |
7034 \fi | |
7035 \closein 1 | |
37713 | 7036 \endgroup |
7037 } | |
7038 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or | |
7039 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory | |
7040 should work if nowhere else does.} | |
7041 | |
7042 | |
7043 % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most | |
7044 % likely, but for now just recognize it. | |
7045 \let\documentencoding = \comment | |
7046 | |
7047 | |
7048 % Page size parameters. | |
7049 % | |
7050 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt | |
7051 | |
7052 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt | |
7053 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt | |
7054 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt | |
7055 | |
7056 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. | |
7057 \vbadness = 10000 | |
7058 | |
7059 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. | |
7060 \hbadness = 2000 | |
7061 | |
7062 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. | |
7063 \widowpenalty=10000 | |
7064 \clubpenalty=10000 | |
7065 | |
7066 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're | |
7067 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of | |
7068 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on | |
7069 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. | |
7070 % | |
7071 \def\setemergencystretch{% | |
7072 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined | |
7073 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. | |
7074 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% | |
7075 \else | |
7076 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize | |
7077 \fi | |
7078 } | |
7079 | |
69769 | 7080 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; |
7081 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; | |
7082 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. | |
7083 % | |
7084 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define | |
7085 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. | |
7086 % | |
7087 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% | |
37713 | 7088 \voffset = #3\relax |
7089 \topskip = #6\relax | |
7090 \splittopskip = \topskip | |
7091 % | |
7092 \vsize = #1\relax | |
7093 \advance\vsize by \topskip | |
7094 \outervsize = \vsize | |
7095 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin | |
7096 \pageheight = \vsize | |
7097 % | |
7098 \hsize = #2\relax | |
7099 \outerhsize = \hsize | |
7100 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in | |
7101 \pagewidth = \hsize | |
7102 % | |
7103 \normaloffset = #4\relax | |
7104 \bindingoffset = #5\relax | |
7105 % | |
69769 | 7106 \ifpdf |
7107 \pdfpageheight #7\relax | |
7108 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax | |
7109 \fi | |
7110 % | |
47284 | 7111 \setleading{\textleading} |
7112 % | |
37713 | 7113 \parindent = \defaultparindent |
7114 \setemergencystretch | |
7115 } | |
7116 | |
7117 % @letterpaper (the default). | |
7118 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
7119 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
47284 | 7120 \textleading = 13.2pt |
37713 | 7121 % |
7122 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. | |
69769 | 7123 \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}% |
7124 {\voffset}{.25in}% | |
7125 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% | |
7126 {11in}{8.5in}% | |
37713 | 7127 }} |
7128 | |
69769 | 7129 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. |
37713 | 7130 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 |
7131 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt | |
47284 | 7132 \textleading = 12pt |
37713 | 7133 % |
69769 | 7134 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% |
7135 {\voffset}{.25in}% | |
7136 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% | |
7137 {9.25in}{7in}% | |
37713 | 7138 % |
7139 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in | |
7140 \tolerance = 700 | |
7141 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
7142 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
7143 \defbodyindent = .5cm | |
69769 | 7144 }} |
7145 | |
7146 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. | |
7147 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) | |
7148 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
7149 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt | |
7150 \textleading = 12pt | |
7151 % | |
7152 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% | |
7153 {-.2in}{-.4in}% | |
7154 {0pt}{14pt}% | |
7155 {9in}{6in}% | |
7156 % | |
7157 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in | |
7158 \tolerance = 700 | |
7159 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
7160 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
7161 \defbodyindent = .4cm | |
37713 | 7162 }} |
7163 | |
7164 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. | |
7165 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
7166 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
69769 | 7167 \textleading = 13.2pt |
7168 % | |
7169 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 | |
7170 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. | |
7171 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust | |
7172 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then | |
7173 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in | |
7174 % your texinfo source file like this: | |
7175 % @tex | |
7176 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm | |
7177 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm | |
7178 % @end tex | |
7179 \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm} | |
7180 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | |
7181 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
7182 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
37713 | 7183 % |
7184 \tolerance = 700 | |
7185 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
69769 | 7186 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
7187 \defbodyindent = 5mm | |
37713 | 7188 }} |
7189 | |
7190 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. | |
7191 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. | |
7192 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. | |
7193 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
7194 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt | |
47284 | 7195 \textleading = 12.5pt |
37713 | 7196 % |
69769 | 7197 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% |
7198 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | |
7199 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% | |
7200 {210mm}{148mm}% | |
37713 | 7201 % |
7202 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in | |
7203 \tolerance = 800 | |
7204 \hfuzz = 1.2pt | |
69769 | 7205 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
37713 | 7206 \defbodyindent = 2mm |
7207 \tableindent = 12mm | |
7208 }} | |
7209 | |
69769 | 7210 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. |
37713 | 7211 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 |
7212 \afourpaper | |
69769 | 7213 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% |
7214 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% | |
7215 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
7216 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
7217 % | |
7218 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. | |
37713 | 7219 \globaldefs = 0 |
7220 }} | |
7221 | |
69769 | 7222 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. |
7223 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
37713 | 7224 \afourpaper |
69769 | 7225 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% |
7226 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% | |
7227 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
7228 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
7229 \globaldefs = 0 | |
7230 }} | |
37713 | 7231 |
7232 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] | |
7233 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, | |
7234 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. | |
7235 % | |
69769 | 7236 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} |
37713 | 7237 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% |
7238 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi | |
7239 \globaldefs = 1 | |
7240 % | |
7241 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
47284 | 7242 \setleading{\textleading}% |
37713 | 7243 % |
69769 | 7244 \dimen0 = #1 |
7245 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset | |
7246 % | |
7247 \dimen2 = \hsize | |
7248 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset | |
7249 % | |
7250 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% | |
7251 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% | |
7252 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
7253 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% | |
37713 | 7254 }} |
7255 | |
7256 % Set default to letter. | |
7257 % | |
7258 \letterpaper | |
7259 | |
7260 | |
7261 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} | |
7262 | |
7263 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. | |
7264 \catcode`\"=\other | |
7265 \catcode`\~=\other | |
7266 \catcode`\^=\other | |
7267 \catcode`\_=\other | |
7268 \catcode`\|=\other | |
7269 \catcode`\<=\other | |
7270 \catcode`\>=\other | |
7271 \catcode`\+=\other | |
7272 \catcode`\$=\other | |
7273 \def\normaldoublequote{"} | |
7274 \def\normaltilde{~} | |
7275 \def\normalcaret{^} | |
7276 \def\normalunderscore{_} | |
7277 \def\normalverticalbar{|} | |
7278 \def\normalless{<} | |
7279 \def\normalgreater{>} | |
7280 \def\normalplus{+} | |
47284 | 7281 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix |
37713 | 7282 |
69769 | 7283 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt |
7284 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, | |
37713 | 7285 % where something hairier probably needs to be done. |
7286 % | |
7287 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print | |
7288 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero | |
7289 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all | |
7290 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. | |
7291 % | |
7292 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} | |
7293 | |
7294 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches | |
7295 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from | |
7296 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway | |
7297 % this is not a problem. | |
7298 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} | |
7299 | |
7300 % Turn off all special characters except @ | |
7301 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). | |
7302 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can | |
7303 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. | |
7304 | |
7305 \catcode`\"=\active | |
7306 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} | |
7307 \let"=\activedoublequote | |
7308 \catcode`\~=\active | |
7309 \def~{{\tt\char126}} | |
7310 \chardef\hat=`\^ | |
7311 \catcode`\^=\active | |
7312 \def^{{\tt \hat}} | |
7313 | |
7314 \catcode`\_=\active | |
7315 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} | |
69769 | 7316 \let\realunder=_ |
37713 | 7317 % Subroutine for the previous macro. |
69769 | 7318 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } |
37713 | 7319 |
7320 \catcode`\|=\active | |
7321 \def|{{\tt\char124}} | |
7322 \chardef \less=`\< | |
7323 \catcode`\<=\active | |
7324 \def<{{\tt \less}} | |
7325 \chardef \gtr=`\> | |
7326 \catcode`\>=\active | |
7327 \def>{{\tt \gtr}} | |
7328 \catcode`\+=\active | |
7329 \def+{{\tt \char 43}} | |
7330 \catcode`\$=\active | |
47284 | 7331 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix |
37713 | 7332 |
7333 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file | |
7334 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. | |
7335 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. | |
7336 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. | |
7337 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} | |
7338 | |
69769 | 7339 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after |
7340 % parsing them. | |
7341 \def\turnoffactive{% | |
7342 \normalturnoffactive | |
7343 \otherbackslash | |
7344 } | |
7345 | |
37713 | 7346 \catcode`\@=0 |
7347 | |
69769 | 7348 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, |
7349 % as in \char`\\. | |
7350 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ | |
7351 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work | |
7352 | |
7353 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and | |
7354 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). | |
7355 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} | |
7356 | |
7357 % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash | |
7358 % in fixed width font. | |
37713 | 7359 \catcode`\\=\active |
69769 | 7360 @def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} |
7361 % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: | |
7362 % @let \ = @normalbackslash | |
7363 | |
7364 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. | |
7365 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with | |
7366 % catcode other. | |
7367 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} | |
7368 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} | |
7369 | |
7370 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of | |
7371 % the literal character `\'. | |
7372 % | |
7373 @def@normalturnoffactive{% | |
7374 @let\=@normalbackslash | |
7375 @let"=@normaldoublequote | |
7376 @let~=@normaltilde | |
7377 @let^=@normalcaret | |
7378 @let_=@normalunderscore | |
7379 @let|=@normalverticalbar | |
7380 @let<=@normalless | |
7381 @let>=@normalgreater | |
7382 @let+=@normalplus | |
7383 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix | |
7384 @unsepspaces | |
7385 } | |
37713 | 7386 |
7387 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. | |
7388 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. | |
7389 @otherifyactive | |
7390 | |
7391 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. | |
7392 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing | |
7393 % a backslash. | |
7394 % | |
7395 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} | |
7396 @global@let\ = @eatinput | |
7397 | |
7398 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then | |
69769 | 7399 % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix |
37713 | 7400 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. |
69769 | 7401 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input |
37713 | 7402 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. |
7403 % | |
7404 @gdef@fixbackslash{% | |
7405 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi | |
7406 @catcode`+=@active | |
7407 @catcode`@_=@active | |
7408 } | |
7409 | |
7410 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. | |
7411 @escapechar = `@@ | |
7412 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
7413 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. |
37713 | 7414 @catcode`@& = @other |
7415 @catcode`@# = @other | |
7416 @catcode`@% = @other | |
7417 | |
7418 | |
7419 @c Local variables: | |
7420 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) | |
7421 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" | |
7422 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" | |
7423 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" | |
7424 @c time-stamp-end: "}" | |
7425 @c End: | |
52401 | 7426 |
69769 | 7427 @c vim:sw=2: |
7428 | |
52790
a93f1f4e2e49
Replace `%' in arch tagline by @ignore.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
52401
diff
changeset
|
7429 @ignore |
a93f1f4e2e49
Replace `%' in arch tagline by @ignore.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
52401
diff
changeset
|
7430 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 |
a93f1f4e2e49
Replace `%' in arch tagline by @ignore.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
52401
diff
changeset
|
7431 @end ignore |